Home
/
Rohde & Schwarz
/
SMBV100A
/
Operating Manual

Rohde & Schwarz SMBV100A, Operating Manual

Share

Page: 142 / 911

Rohde & Schwarz SMBV100A Operating Manual Download Page 142

Instrument Function

R&S

®

SMBV100A

127

Operating Manual 1176.8016.02 ─ 17

7. In the browser, go the step "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License > Install

Deactivation Key (from file)" and enter the deactivation response of the instrument.

The license is deactivated for the source instrument.

8. In the "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License" go to step "Create License" to

generate a license key for this portable option and the selected target instrument.
Download the license key as a file and transfer it to the target instrument.

9. In the target instrument, select "Setup > Manage License Keys > Import License

Keys from File" and select the created license key file.

The portable option is installed on the target instrument.

General Instrument Settings

«
...
140
141
142
143
144
...
»

Summary of Contents for SMBV100A

Page 1: ...R S SMBV100A Vector Signal Generator Operating Manual Operating Manual 1176 8016 02 17 ÚÞ 2 ...

Page 2: ...on 4 15 125 xx and later of the R S SMBV100A 2017 Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Mühldorfstr 15 81671 München Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R S is a registered trademark of Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Trade names are trademarks of their owners The following abbrevi...

Page 3: ...se of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained ...

Page 4: ...ration item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided ...

Page 5: ...safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the mains supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 In the ca...

Page 6: ...st be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage 14 Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock 15 Any object that ...

Page 7: ...e masks and protective clothing must be worn 7 Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions m...

Page 8: ...ackaging until they are ready to be used 4 Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted 5 If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid 6 Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline...

Page 9: ... National waste disposal regulations must be observed 4 If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the releva...

Page 10: ...bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales así como la documentación del producto y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas...

Page 11: ...raves o incluso la muerte Indica una situación de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situación de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones leves o moderadas Indica información que se considera importante pero no en relación con situaciones de peligro p ej avisos sobre posibles daños materiales En la documentación del producto se emplea de...

Page 12: ...mentación del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques eléctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad eléctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad eléctrica pueden producirse choques eléctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posibl...

Page 13: ...60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 válidos en cada caso 11 A menos que esté permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto esté en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o daños en el producto 12 Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deberá primero conectar el conductor de p...

Page 14: ... manipulación mecánica y o térmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el capítulo Eliminación protección del medio ambiente punto 1 5 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF pueden a causa de su función natural emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protección de las mujer...

Page 15: ...to a las baterías y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el estándar EN 62133 1 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas 2 Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamien...

Page 16: ... sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminación se debe efectuar exclusivamente a través de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atención al cliente de Rohde Schwarz 2 Los dispositivos eléctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos domésticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eli...

Page 17: ...rument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde...

Page 18: ...apers etc 19 1 3 Notes on Screenshots 19 2 Preparing for Use 20 2 1 Front Panel Tour 20 2 1 1 Utility Keys 21 2 1 2 Standby LEDs and Standby Key 22 2 1 3 Display 22 2 1 4 Setup Keys 24 2 1 4 1 Keys for Setting Parameters 24 2 1 4 2 Display Keys 25 2 1 5 Keypad for data entry 26 2 1 6 Rotary Knob and Navigation Keys 27 2 1 7 Front Panel Connectors 27 2 2 Rear Panel Tour 28 2 2 1 Description of the ...

Page 19: ...s 45 2 7 Remote Access via an External Controller 46 2 7 1 Using a Web Browser for Remote Access 47 2 7 2 Remote Access via a VNC Client Software 49 2 8 LXI Configuration 53 2 8 1 LXI Browser Settings 54 2 8 2 LAN Configuration 56 2 8 2 1 IP Configuration 56 2 8 2 2 Advanced LAN Configuration 57 2 8 2 3 Ping Client 58 2 8 2 4 Web Control 59 2 8 2 5 SCPI Remote Trace 60 3 Getting Started 63 3 1 Bri...

Page 20: ...logs 87 4 2 7 Graphical Display of Output Signal Characteristics 88 4 3 Accessing Dialogs 89 4 4 Setting Parameters 90 4 4 1 Working with the Cursor 91 4 4 2 Selecting a Control Element 92 4 4 3 Switching Parameters On Off 92 4 4 4 Entering a Value 92 4 4 5 Working with Units 94 4 4 6 Selecting a Value from a List 95 4 4 7 Terminating Entries with Confirmation 95 4 4 8 Restoring the Previous Value...

Page 21: ...eys 124 5 2 3 5 NRP Z Info Update 129 5 2 3 6 Delete Temporary Files 131 5 2 3 7 Display Update 132 5 2 3 8 Selftest 132 5 2 3 9 Check Front Panel 133 5 2 3 10 Shutting Down and Rebooting the Instrument 135 5 2 3 11 Date and Time 135 5 2 3 12 Network Settings 136 5 2 3 13 Global Trigger Clock External Input Settings 139 5 2 3 14 Display Keyboard Settings 142 5 2 3 15 Remote Channel Settings 143 5 ...

Page 22: ...erring Files from and to the Instrument 171 5 3 Graphical Display Graphics 174 5 3 1 Graphics Settings Menu 175 5 3 2 Bar of Graphics Window 177 5 3 3 Signal Displays 179 5 3 3 1 I Q Diagram 179 5 3 3 2 Vector Diagram 180 5 3 3 3 Constellation Diagram 181 5 3 3 4 Eye Diagram 181 5 3 3 5 CCDF Display 182 5 3 3 6 Power Spectrum 182 5 4 Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements 183 5 4 1 Test Setup 183 5...

Page 23: ...acteristics 208 5 5 2 RF Frequency 209 5 5 2 1 RF Frequency vs RF Output Frequency 209 5 5 2 2 Setting the RF Frequency 210 5 5 2 3 RF Frequency Dialog 210 5 5 2 4 Frequency Settings 210 5 5 2 5 User Variation Settings 212 5 5 3 Phase 212 5 5 3 1 Phase Settings 213 5 5 4 Reference Oscillator 213 5 5 4 1 Reference Oscillator Settings 215 5 5 5 Local Oscillator LO Coupling 217 5 5 5 1 Phase Coherenc...

Page 24: ... Frequency Modulation FM 253 5 5 12 4 Phase Modulation PhiM 256 5 5 12 5 Pulse Modulation PM 259 5 5 13 Modulation Generator and LF Output 261 5 5 13 1 Overview of LF Generator 261 5 5 13 2 LF Output 262 5 5 13 3 LF Frequency Sweep 263 5 5 13 4 Pulse Generator 269 5 5 14 RF Sweep and List Mode 275 5 5 14 1 Overview 275 5 5 14 2 RF Frequency Sweep 276 5 5 14 3 RF Level Sweep 283 5 5 14 4 List Mode ...

Page 25: ...ation 322 5 8 5 Signal Monitoring 322 5 8 6 Power On Settings 323 5 9 Baseband Signal Baseband Block 323 5 9 1 Working with the Baseband Signal 324 5 9 2 Data and Signal Sources in Baseband 326 5 9 2 1 Internal PRBS Data and Data Patterns 327 5 9 2 2 Internal Modulation Data from Lists 328 5 9 2 3 Clock Signals 328 5 9 2 4 Synchronous Signal Generation 329 5 9 2 5 Control Signals 333 5 9 2 6 Trigg...

Page 26: ...tings Menu 453 5 10 2 2 Frequency and Phase Offset 457 6 Remote Control Basics 459 6 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols 459 6 1 1 VISA Libraries 460 6 1 2 Messages 460 6 1 3 LAN Interface 461 6 1 3 1 HiSLIP Protocol 463 6 1 3 2 VXI 11 Protocol 463 6 1 3 3 Socket Communication 463 6 1 3 4 LAN Interface Messages 464 6 1 4 USB Interface 464 6 1 5 Serial Interface 465 6 1 6 GPIB Interface IEC I...

Page 27: ... 4 Overview of Syntax Elements 489 6 3 5 Structure of a Command Line 490 6 3 6 Responses to Queries 491 6 4 Command Sequence and Synchronization 492 6 4 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution 493 6 5 Status Reporting System 494 6 5 1 Hierarchy of the Status Registers 494 6 5 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register 496 6 5 3 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE 498 6 5 4 Event Status R...

Page 28: ...rol Lists 532 7 5 BERT and BLER Subsystems 532 7 6 CALibration Subsystem 544 7 7 CLOCk Subsystem 549 7 8 DIAGnostic Subsystem 549 7 9 DISPlay Subsystem 551 7 10 FORMat Subsystem 554 7 11 HCOPy Subsystem 556 7 12 KBOard Subsystem 561 7 13 MMEMory Subsystem 562 7 13 1 File Naming Conventions 562 7 13 2 Extensions for User Files 563 7 13 3 Examples 565 7 13 4 Remote Control Commands 567 7 14 OUTPut S...

Page 29: ... 1 Analog I Q Outputs 749 7 16 10 2 Digital I Q Outputs 753 7 16 11 SOURce LFOutput Subsystem 757 7 16 12 SOURce LIST Subsystem 767 7 16 13 SOURce MODulation Subsystem 780 7 16 14 SOURce PGEN Subsystem 780 7 16 15 SOURce PHASe Subsystem 781 7 16 16 SOURce PM Subsystem 782 7 16 17 SOURce POWer Subsystem 785 7 16 18 SOURce PULM Subsystem 796 7 16 19 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem 803 7 16 20 SOURce SW...

Page 30: ...Info line 854 9 1 3 Status information displayed in the Info line 854 9 2 Error Messages 855 9 2 1 Volatile messages 856 9 2 2 Permanent messages 856 9 3 SCPI Error Messages 856 9 4 Device Specific Error Messages 856 9 5 Resolving Network Connection Failures 858 9 6 Obtaining Technical Support 859 Annex 861 A Hardware Interfaces 861 A 1 GPIB Bus Interface 861 List of Commands 863 Index 880 ...

Page 31: ...Contents R S SMBV100A 16 Operating Manual 1176 8016 02 17 ...

Page 32: ...ct is electrical safety The Basic Safety Instructions are delivered with the R S SMBV in different languages in print Throughout the documentation safety instructions are provided when you need to take care during setup or operation Always read the safety instructions carefully Make sure to comply fully with them Do not take risks and do not underestimate the potential danger of small details such...

Page 33: ...ual Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications module replace ment and repair firmware update troubleshooting and fault elimination and contains mechanical drawings and spare part lists The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde Schwarz information system GLORIS https gloris rohde schwarz com 1 2 4 Instrument Security Procedures Deals with se...

Page 34: ...c These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu lar topics See www rohde schwarz com application smbv100a 1 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The shown values may n...

Page 35: ...erview of the generator functions and introduces the operating concept Detailed operating instructions and an overview of menus follow in Chapter 4 Manual Operation on page 76 For all reference information concerning manual and remote control of the instrument refer to the online help system or its printed printable version A more detailed descrip tion of the hardware connectors and interfaces is ...

Page 36: ...e information on the instrument and assistance For more information refer to chapter Instrument Settings in the Operating Manual PRESET Sets the instrument to a defined state see Chapter 2 3 5 4 Default Settings on page 38 LOCAL Switches from remote control to local manual control SETUP Opens the Setup dialog for configuring presettings HCOPY Opens the Hardcopy menu for configuring and starting pr...

Page 37: ...eft corner of the front panel The ON STANDBY key toggles the instrument between standby and ready state indi cated by the standby LEDs The standby LEDs indicate the instrument states as follow the green LED left is on when the instrument is ready for operation the yellow LED right is on in the standby mode See also Chapter 2 3 5 1 Standby and Ready state on page 37 2 1 3 Display The display clearl...

Page 38: ... containing offset and peak envelope power PEP Status messages Brief error messages To access an window with detailed information for a message use the INFO key Block diagram The block diagram shows the current configuration and the signal flow in the gen erator with the aid of function blocks containing an on off switch Selecting a func tion block opens a list of associated setting menus Active m...

Page 39: ...equency entry RF ON OFF Switches the RF signal on and off RF OFF is displayed in the header next to the Frequency field LEVEL Activates level entry MOD ON OFF Switches the modulations on and off MOD OFF is displayed in the info line of the header next to the Level field FILE Activates the menu for storing or loading files see Chapter 4 7 File Management on page 105 RECALCULATE Starts the recalcula...

Page 40: ... a menu Shifts the entry cursor from the header display to the previously active menu or to the previously highlighted block in the block diagram if no menu is active Shifts the cursor from a function block in the diagram to the first item in the Win bar If no menus are open the current cursor position remains unchanged TOGGLE Switches highlighted elements or a function block on and off Switches b...

Page 41: ...ects a unit and thus determine the absolute value or changes the unit i e trigger a recalculation without changing the absolute value The function depends on the time at which the UNIT key is used during parameter entry see Chapter 4 4 5 Working with Units on page 94 For unit free values the X1 key is equivalent to ENTER It confirms the previous entry and deactivates the input field _ Adds a blank...

Page 42: ...on numeric values at a defined step width in editing mode Moves the cursor e g to a function block in the block diagram Scrolls within lists tables or tree views Acts like the ENTER key when it is pressed Shifts the selection bar within focused areas e g lists if the edit mode is activa ted Note Turning or pressing the rotary knob is equivalent to pressing the UP and DOWN keys or the ENTER key in ...

Page 43: ...or this type of connector and apply the torque specified in the application note 1MA99 The application notes are available on the Internet and provide additional information on care and handling of RF connectors Rohde Schwarz offers appropriate torque wrenches for various connectors For ordering information see the R S SMBV data sheet or product brochure USB USB universal serial bus interfaces of ...

Page 44: ...s 1 and 2 for triggering and control of external devices with user definable marker signals For more information see section Global Trigger Clock Input Settings in the Operating Manual USB IN USB universal serial bus interface of type B device USB This interface can be used for remote control of the instrument USB CONNECTORS TYPE A USB universal serial bus interfaces of type A host USB Connection ...

Page 45: ...an be removed from the instrument but it is bound to the specific R S SMBV Therefore it cannot be changed between dif ferent instruments NOTICE Risk of instrument damage and data loss During operation the instrument is accessing the hard disk Removing the hard disk while operating will lead to data loss or even instrument damage Do not remove the hard disk during operation CLOCK OUT Output for int...

Page 46: ...488 interface for remote control of the instrument See also Chapter A 1 GPIB Bus Interface on page 861 and chapter Remote Con trol Basics in the Operating Manual Note In order to avoid electromagnetic interference EMI caused by open lines always terminate any connected IEC bus cable with an instrument or a controller SIGNAL VALID Output of valid signal This signal marks the valid signal times vali...

Page 47: ...t to two positions 0 The instrument is disconnected from the mains I The instrument is power supplied It is either ready for operation STANDBY or in operating mode depending on the position of the ON STANDBY switch on the instrument front See also data sheet and Chapter 2 3 4 Connecting the Instrument to the AC Supply on page 36 EXT MOD Input for external analog modulation signals LF Output for in...

Page 48: ...rge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument s test ports To pre vent electrostatic discharge use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the ground or use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions An unsuitable operating site or test setup can damage the instrum...

Page 49: ... Pull off the corrugated cardboard cover that protects the rear of the instrument 4 Carefully unthread the corrugated cardboard cover at the front that protects the instrument handles and remove it 5 Check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory lists for the various items 6 Check the instrument for any damage If there is damage immediately contact the carrier who ...

Page 50: ... 500 N Risk of injury when stacking instruments A stack of instruments can tilt over and cause injury if not stacked correctly Further more the instruments at the bottom of the stack can be damaged due to the load imposed by the instruments on top Observe the following instructions when stacking instruments Never stack more than three instruments If you need to stack more than three instruments in...

Page 51: ...e using the AC power cable deliv ered with the instrument Note The instrument is in compliance with safety class EN61010 1 Connect the instrument only to a socket with earthing contact 2 3 5 Starting the Instrument The R S SMBV comes with or without a power switch depending on the design of the otherwise technically equivalent power supply unit Switching off the AC power You can leave the AC power...

Page 52: ...LED is on The standby power only supplies the power switch circuits and the oven controlled crystal oscillator to keep it at its oper ating temperature In this state it is safe to switch off the AC power and disconnect the instrument from the power supply 2 3 5 2 Start Display and Booting The instrument boots the operating system starts the instrument firmware and auto matically performs a selftes...

Page 53: ...ated with one dialog Most of the dialog boxes provide a special Set to Default button that resets directly the settings associated to the corresponding dialog e g all digital modula tion settings in the Custom Digital Mod dialog These settings are identical to those which are called up using the PRESET key Preset the instrument to a predefined state The PRESET key calls up a defined instrument set...

Page 54: ...Display Update Setup menu Display and keyboard settings Setup menu User defined instrument states can be stored and called up in the File dialog 2 3 6 Shutting Down the Instrument To shut down the R S SMBV proceed as described below Risk of losing data If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting the power cord the instrument loses its current settings F...

Page 55: ...hat the instrument is switched off and disconnected from all power supplies Always use fuses supplied by Rohde Schwarz as spare parts or fuses of the same type and rating 2 4 Connecting External Accessories The equivalent USB ports on the front and or rear panel of the R S SMBV can be used to connect a variety of accessories In addition the instrument provides interfaces for network integration se...

Page 56: ...vice is made available as a new drive usb The name of the drive is manufacturer dependent Connecting a keyboard The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected The default keyboard lay out is English US Use the Setup Keyboard Settings dialog to configure the keyboard properties Connecting a mouse The mouse is detected automatically when it is connected 2 5 Linux Operating System The in...

Page 57: ...face The memory stick the hard disk and the flash memory are accessed via the File Manager Accessing the File System The instrument also supports two standard methods to access the file system form a remote client FTP file transfer protocol File sharing according to the SAMBA SMB server message block protocol Both methods allow the access to the folder var user share Default password The FTP and S...

Page 58: ...ck e g using network folders This section describes how to configure the LAN interface It includes the following top ics Chapter 2 6 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network on page 43 Chapter 2 6 2 Assigning the IP Address on page 44 Accessing Operating System No access to the operating system is required for normal operation All necessary system settings can be made in the Setup dialog 2 6 1 C...

Page 59: ...can cause network connection failures If the network connection to the instrument fails check the network infrastructure and contact your network administrator For details see section Status Information Error Messages and Troubleshooting 2 6 2 Assigning the IP Address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instru ment can be obtained in different ways If the net...

Page 60: ...ded that you address the instrument by its unambiguous computer name see Chapter 2 6 3 Using Computer Names on page 45 A computer name hostname is an unique dedicated identification of the instrument that remains permanent as long as it is not explicitly changed Hence you can address an instrument by the same identification computer name irrespectively if a network or a point to point connection i...

Page 61: ...his allows convenient operation of the instrument from the desktop although the instrument is integrated in a rack somewhere else For an overview of the instrument s operating concept and the different ways to control and operate the instrument see Chapter 3 1 Brief Introduction to the Instrument s Concept on page 63 There are different ways to establish a remote access connection to the signal ge...

Page 62: ... cut ting the connection it is still enabled and can be established again any time The con nection is disabled only after deactivation of the program This section gives an information on how to use the Web browser for remote access how to install the applications for remote access and how to establish the connection between the instrument and an external computer with Windows operating system Remo...

Page 63: ...e Environment JRE on the remote computer 3 Type the instruments IP address in the address field of the Web browser on your PC e g http 10 111 11 1 The VNC Authentication screen appears 4 Enter the password and select OK The default password is instrument After the connection is established the current signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed and the instrument can be remote acce...

Page 64: ...ed access Setting up a VNC connection 1 Connect the instrument and the remote computer to a LAN see Chapter 2 6 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network on page 43 2 Install the Ultr VNC application and enable it on the instrument 3 In the ICF firewall enable communication on the network via Ultr VNC program 4 Install the VNC Viewer on the remote computer with Windows operating system see Instal...

Page 65: ...n This description focus only on the relevant settings a Select installation of all components b In the Additional Task Panel enable all entries A successful installation is indicated by a message At the same time a warning is displayed stating that a password must be set 4 Select OK The Default Local System Properties panel opens Remote Access via an External Controller ...

Page 66: ...r VNC program form internet and follow the installation instruc tions Only the program component VNC Viewer is required Note The VNC Viewer program is included in the download for the installation of the Ultr VNC program on the signal generator if Full installation was selected in the Select Component panel In this case the program ultr vncviewer exe can be copied to the Windows PC 2 Install VNC V...

Page 67: ...Setting up the VNC connection on the Windows remote computer 1 Start VNC Viewer program component on the PC select VNC Server and enter IP address of the instrument 2 To initialize the connection select Connect A message requesting the password appears 3 Enter the password as defined in the Default Local System Properties panel of the Ultr VNC program and select Log On The connection is establishe...

Page 68: ...removing the program on the instrument or by deactivating the VNC Server service 1 Remove the VNC program a Press the Windows key to access the operating system and open the Add or Remove Programs by selecting Start Settings Control Panel Add or Remove Programs b Remove the VNC program 2 Deactivate the VNC Server service a Press the Windows key to access the operating system and open the Ser vices...

Page 69: ... order to enable the full LXI functionality Default state of the network settings According to the LXI standard an LCI must set the following parameters to a default state Parameter Value TCP IP Mode DHCP Auto IP Address Dynamic DNS Enabled ICMP Ping Enabled Password for LAN configuration LxiWebIfc The LCI for the R S SMBV also resets the following parameters Parameter Value Hostname Instrument sp...

Page 70: ...the LXI status indication When activated the LXI LEDs flash both in the browser dialog and in the LXI dialog of the connected instrument A green LXI status symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been established a red symbol indicates that no LAN cable is connected Lan Configuration allows you to configure LAN parameters and to initiate a ping see Chapter 2 8 2 3 Ping Client on page 58 Status ...

Page 71: ... Status indicator in the LXI Status dialog For further information see section LXI Status in the Operating Manual 2 8 2 LAN Configuration The LAN Configuration web page provides access to the parameters required for identifying the R S SMBV in the network and allows modification Password protection Changing the LAN configuration is password protected The default password is Lxi WebIfc notice upper...

Page 72: ...ered IP address subnet mask and default gateway are used With dynamic configuration DHCP or dynamic link local addressing automatic IP are used to obtain the instrument IP address See Chapter 2 6 2 Assigning the IP Address on page 44 2 8 2 2 Advanced LAN Configuration The Advanced Config page provides LAN settings that are not declared mandatory by the LXI standard LXI Configuration ...

Page 73: ...covery Must be enabled to detect the instrument in the LAN If you disable this setting the instrument cannot be detected by the VXI 11 discov ery protocol mechanism The setting does not affect other detection mechanisms Setting up a VXI 11 connection via the IP address or the host name is independent of this setting 2 8 2 3 Ping Client The Ping Client page provides the ping utility to verify the c...

Page 74: ...it 2 8 2 4 Web Control The web control functionality provides remote operation via VNC using a Web browser with HTML5 This mode does not require additional installation or activation The VNC protocol allows simultaneous operation from several remote devices The instru ment remains locally operable The GUI of the R S SMBV is visible To perform the settings you can operate the instrument as with the...

Page 75: ...he ENTER key After the connection is established the current screen of the R S SMBV is dis played in the browser window 6 Use the mouse cursor and keyboard to access the functionality of the instrument as you would directly perform the settings on the instruments front panel 2 8 2 5 SCPI Remote Trace The remote trace functionality allows you to trace input and output strings at the remote control ...

Page 76: ...ation sent and received The function records all sent commands received responses and messages and stores them in an internal database If live mode is disabled you can display the recent traces upon request using the refresh button You can also store the log in a file Note The diagnostics functionality is extended in later releases e g to download or upload SCPI command files from to the instrumen...

Page 77: ...y double clicking a message Columns The following columns are available if no column filter is applied Rec record number of the message within the message log I number of the subinstrument MT indicates the type of the message Possible values and related message contents are incoming command outgoing response to a query E error message highlighted by red color T execution time i e time required by ...

Page 78: ... page 65 and Chapter 3 3 RF Section on page 68 respectively The operating concept of the R S SMBV employs the following three ways of instru ment control Manual operation Remote control Remote access Manual Operation The R S SMBV can be entirely operated from the front panel Peripherals such as mouse or keyboard can be connected but are not essential The R S SMBV is equipped with an intuitive user...

Page 79: ...mplete list of existing conflicts is displayed when the INFO CTRL I key is pressed Additional information on entries can be requested from the help system The history function permits display of all messages Assistants simplify the completion of tables After data entry in the assistant the table is modified only after the Accept button has been pressed Pressing the Accept but ton also stores the a...

Page 80: ...n be execu ted using specific key combinations on the keyboard or a front panel key emulation that can be operated with the mouse This way of operation and the instructions how to set up a connection for remote access are described in Chapter 2 7 Remote Access via an External Controller on page 46 3 2 Baseband Section The baseband section of the R S SMBV is fully digital and contains the hardware ...

Page 81: ... e g with output of the digital I Q signal or if an external anaolg signal is fed to the I Q modulator both sections can be processed independently Further processing of the I Q signal The R S SMBV allows further processing of the I Q signal as summarized below In the AWGN IMP block the R S SMBV allows the digital I Q signal to be impaired or added with noise before it is passed on Additionally a ...

Page 82: ...l interface The signal is transferred directly to the I Q modulator I Q Mod function block Conversely as output the block is used to configure the digital I Q output The inter nally generated baseband signal is configured in the Baseband function block The digital settings are performed in the corresponding menus I and Q components can also be swapped I Q Swap The status line in a block displays t...

Page 83: ...log Wideband I Q mode I and Q components can also be swapped I Q Swap Analog I Q impairments can be set in addition Unlike the impairments in the AWGN IMP block impairments in the I Q Mod block also affect the externally applied signals in the Analog Wideband I Q mode The status display in the block shows whether I Q impairments and or I Q swap is active I Q modulation is switched on or off with t...

Page 84: ...analog modulation modes Amplitude modulation Pulse modulation option R S SMBV K22 Note For modulation modes that can be simultaneously used refer to the R S SMBV data sheet 3 4 Example of Setup This section provides an example on how to configure the instrument to generate and display a simple QPSK modulated signal Configuring and displaying a QPSK modulated signal To generate and display a QPSK m...

Page 85: ... 1176 8016 02 17 a Turn the rotary knob and select the Baseband A block b Press the rotary knob to open the menu where the digital modulation can be selected different modulation modes are available depending on the options installed Example of Setup ...

Page 86: ... and highlight Custom Digital Mod Press the rotary knob to open the Custom Dig Mod dialog d Turn the rotary knob to select parameter Symbol Rate press the rotary knob to allow editing and enter the preffered symbol rate with the aid of the numeric keypad and the unit keys Example of Setup ...

Page 87: ...b to select parameter Coding Press the button to open the selection list Turn the rotary knob to select Off and press the knob to activate the selected item f Use the rotary knob in the same way to set Modulation Type QPSK and Fil ter Root Cosine with Roll Off Factor 0 3 Example of Setup ...

Page 88: ... 1176 8016 02 17 g Finally select State and press the rotary knob to switch on the digital modula tion h Press the DIAGRAM key to display the complete block diagram To indicate the active state the Baseband block is displayed in blue Example of Setup ...

Page 89: ...put 3 Set frequency and level and activate RF signal a Press the FREQ key to activate the editing mode for frequency entry The Fre quency entry field in the header section of the display is highlighted Enter the frequency using the numeric keypad and terminate the entry by pressing a unit key b Press the LEVEL key and enter the level settings in the same way c Press the DIAGRAM key to display the ...

Page 90: ...ng Manual 1176 8016 02 17 4 Select graphics display of I Q signal a Turn the rotary knob to select the Graphics block and open the respective menu b Select State On with the rotary knob to activate display of the I Q diagram Example of Setup ...

Page 91: ... manual operating concept of the R S SMBV enables the user to make settings as intuitively as possible and at the same time gives a permanent overview of characteris tics of the generated signal and of the current instrument state Numerous online help functions support user settings Block diagram The block diagram is the core of the operating concept A graphics display shows the current configurat...

Page 92: ...l modulation can be selected Signal flow The signal flow between the function blocks and the employed inputs and outputs are also shown Menu tree The menu tree can be opened and closed with the MENU CTRL M key The menu tree is organized in the same way as the directories under Windows The function blocks correspond to the first directory level the menus to subdirectories Operation corresponds to t...

Page 93: ... each other i e none of the dialogs requires that settings in other dialogs be completed before it can be closed This ensures flexible operation at all times Winbar The Winbar gives an overview of menus and simplifies their access The menus are displayed on top of the block diagram but they can be hidden with the aid of the HIDE CTRL H key i e displayed in the form of a button in the Winbar at the...

Page 94: ...sible range the next permissible value is automatically set and a message is output Context sensitive help Context sensitive help for each parameter can be called with the HELP or F1 key Comprehensive online help Each help page is part of a comprehensive online help function which can be called by means of an index a content tree or the Previous Next buttons Info line with messages for indication ...

Page 95: ...ally selected for processing Graphics editor for definition of control signals Control signals are also graphically configured Graphical display of output signal in a diagram The output signal can be graphically displayed in a number of diagrams This allows a fast check of signal characteristics Zoom functions and the insertion of a reference trace permit in depth evaluation without an external an...

Page 96: ...es the main output signal parameters and reports the current state with status error and warning messages The block diagram shows the instrument configuration the signal characteristic as well as the inputs and outputs used and permits interactive operation via graphics elements Active menus and graphs are displayed on top of the block diagram Winbar with labeled softkeys for menu display The bloc...

Page 97: ...played in the header field of the screen The display may vary depending on the instrument s operating mode In the sweep mode the current frequency or level of the output signal is displayed The status message SweepMode is displayed in the info line In the list mode neither the current frequency nor level is displayed the indication is dimmed If user correction is active the status message UCorr is...

Page 98: ...ayed between the frequency and level fields at the left of the info line or in the info line itself 4 2 2 2 Messages Messages indicate errors in the instrument They are displayed in the info line in differ ent colors depending on their importance and display duration Errors e g no calibra tion data are displayed in red information e g file not found and warnings in black Warnings indicate less sig...

Page 99: ...I key The upper section of the info window contains a list of all current permanent messages in the order of their occurrence i e the most recent message is displayed first In the lower section of the window additional information on the highlighted message is dis played A history of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch on can be called with the History key The most recent messa...

Page 100: ...me time cleared in the list 4 2 4 Block Diagram The block diagram shows provided options signal configuration and the currently selected signal flow of the generator with inputs and outputs used Signal generation can be completely operated from the block diagram The highlighted function block can be directly switched on and off with the TOGGLE ON OFF CTRL T key Pressing the Enter opens the associa...

Page 101: ...nal information e g the num ber of channels 4 2 4 2 Signal Flow and Input Output Symbols in the Block Diagram The input output symbols in the block diagram show the currently used inputs and out puts of the signal generator Unused inputs and outputs are not shown The lines indi cate the signal flow Symbols and labels refer to the corresponding inputs and outputs on the front and rear panel of the ...

Page 102: ...th menu is opened the menu that was opened first is automatically closed Some menus e g data and list editor menus cover the Winbar and assign menu specific functions to the front panel softkeys by way of the menu buttons Any of the open menus can be activated either with the respective button in the Win bar or the front panel softkey In combination with the keys for menu operation CLOSE ESC HIDE ...

Page 103: ...ion common to all parameters Example Impairments Each of the setting fields is assigned a parameter name The kind of setting varies depending on the parameter to be set Some settings can only be made in a specific configuration If setting is not permitted with the specific configuration selected the respective item is disabled and displayed in gray and the entry or selection field cannot be access...

Page 104: ...AGRAM CTRL D and REARR CTRL A keys on the front panel For a quick access to the dialogs use one of the following alternative methods Displaying the block diagram or a dialog in the foreground 1 Press the DIAGRAM CTRL D key to move the cursor to the block diagram All active menus are minimized and displayed in the form of Winbar buttons 2 Press the associated softkey CTRL F1 F8 to display the dialo...

Page 105: ... SMBV offers several and sometimes alternative possibilities for setting parameters Operation is possible from the front panel with the aid of a mouse and or from a PC keyboard The examples whitin this description focus on the operation from the front panel For more information refer to Chapter 4 8 Legend of Front Panel Controls on page 112 for an overview of key functions and a cross reference be...

Page 106: ...4 4 5 Working with Units on page 94 Chapter 4 4 6 Selecting a Value from a List on page 95 Chapter 4 4 7 Terminating Entries with Confirmation on page 95 Chapter 4 4 8 Restoring the Previous Value on page 96 4 4 1 Working with the Cursor After the instrument is switched on the cursor is always on the first function block of the diagram default setting Moving the cursor on the display To move the c...

Page 107: ...ry in a list or table is concerned To activate an element put the cursor on it An active element is highlighted by a blue frame 4 4 3 Switching Parameters On Off A parameter can be activated and deactivated using a button or a check box 1 Select the parameter 2 To change the state of a parameter use the Enter function of the different control media Press the rotary knob Press ENTER Press the TOGGL...

Page 108: ...the left of the number to be changed using the LEFT RIGHT arrow keys The cursor is displayed in green 3 Click on a numeric key to insert a new value Editing a value in the overwrite mode 1 Activate the editing mode 2 Set the cursor on the numeric digit to be changed using the LEFT RIGHT arrow keys The cursor is displayed in blue and the number to be replaced is highlighted 3 Click on a numeric key...

Page 109: ...meric value 1 Press the rotary knob Enter 2 Press a UNIT key on the front panel 3 Select a Unit in the selection field next to the parameter value 4 4 5 Working with Units The unit of a parameter is displayed next to the value When the parameter is edited the unit is selected either from the list or by means of the front panel keys When the entry is completed the unit can be changed In this case t...

Page 110: ... for the selected parameter To select a item from a list proceed as follow 1 Press ENTER key to open the list 2 Use one of the following alternatives to navigate through the list a Turn the rotary knob or use the UP DOWN arrow keys The selected item is highlighted b Press TOGGLE ON OFF key several times until the preferred entry is dis played in the selection field 3 To confirm the selection press...

Page 111: ...ation is interrupted to allow the user to make further settings Calculation is restarted with the RECALCULATE key and the modulation is switched on again when the calculation is completed Preventing recalculation If an instrument function requires several parameter settings switch the function off to prevent a recalculation Enable the function after the entire configuration of the settings have be...

Page 112: ...on All previous values are restored 4 5 Editors The R S SMBV provides user friendly editors for defining data lists as well as control and marker signals Lists containing frequency and level value pairs are used for the list mode and the user defined level correction Internally generated data lists can be used for digital modulation and digital standards the same applies to internally defined cont...

Page 113: ...ng list can be edited in the insert or overwrite mode use the INSERT key to toggle between this two modes Terminate the entry by pressing a UNIT key 4 To select a row select the GoTo button and press the ENTER key Use the numeric keys to enter the row index in the entry field and press the ENTER key to confirm the entry The cursor moves to the selected row 5 To insert a new row in the table select...

Page 114: ...e While it is being processed the file is continuously automatically buffered When the dialog is exited the file is automatically saved with the new values i e there is no extra Save button Depending on the size of the file saving may take some time Editing an existing data list 1 To access a data editor and open an existing data list for editing use the arrow keys to select the associated button ...

Page 115: ... the hexadecimal values in turn are displayed in pairs of two The hex functions are automatically assigned to the numeric keys at the front panel 7 To save the data list press the ESC key The list is saved automatically when the dialog is closed Creating a new data list 1 To create an empty data list in the individual menu select List Management Select Data List to Edit Create Data List and enter ...

Page 116: ... along the bit axis A cursor can be shifted alongside this line and marks the position where a ramp is to be set The color of the cursor changes depending on the current function Use the ENTER key to switch over between the colors and therefore functions black marks the bit position on the marker line yellow sets a ramp green activates the marked ramp for shifting Accessing control and marker list...

Page 117: ...t the Zoom In button and press the ENTER key The selected number of symbols bits around the current cursor position are dis played Ramps outside the displayed area are not lost by zooming 6 Use the Save Save As function to save the edited control marker list under its current name or under a new name Enter the file name in the Create File dialog and select the directory see Chap ter 4 7 1 File Sel...

Page 118: ... ramp transitions of the other ramps are adapted to the changed signal status high or low 4 Set the ramps in a table Select the Edit Table button and define the positions and states of the ramps for the selected marker Confirm the entries with Accept 5 Preset a marker signal Select the Preset button to preset the marker signal The ramps of the selected marker are adjusted according to the selected...

Page 119: ...two main areas Contents contains a table of help contents Topic contains a specific help topic The help system provides additionally an Index and a Find area as well as Zoom functions that are accessed by means of the corresponding buttons Navigating in the table of contents 1 To navigate within the table of contents entries use the UP DOWN keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with...

Page 120: ...B stick or on the a hard disk R S SMBV B92 Both the var directory on the internal flash card or the hdd directory on the hard disk R S SMBV B92 can be used to save user defined data Any directory structure can be created on var and hdd Some default subdirectories are predefined but can be changed at any time The opt directory is a protected system drive and therefore unaccessible system directory ...

Page 121: ...ll then be edited in the data and control list editor These functions are offered in the Data List Man agement dialog of the individual modulation menu Waveforms Waveforms are generated externally e g by means of the R S WinIQSIM2 pro gram that is supplied together with the optional Baseband Generator R S SMBV B10 and can be loaded in the Arbitrary Waveform Generation dialog Softkeys are assigned ...

Page 122: ...ays the available drives and directories In the upper part Recent Data Sets the files last used are listed The available drives and directories and the files of the selected directory are dis played The currently selected path is displayed above the window Only the relevant files without file extensions are displayed If the area is opened several times the path last selected is displayed When a fi...

Page 123: ...he file is to be saved and then select the Save but ton 5 Create a new file To create a new file use the Save Settings functionality i e specify file name and directory and save the file The created file is empty it must be filled with the necessary values in the individ ual editor 4 7 2 File Manager The File Manager allows general file management such as copying shifting renam ing and deleting fi...

Page 124: ...ing files To move a file select the file and press the Cut button Mark the directory to which the file is to be moved and select the Paste button If the target directory already contains a file with the same name a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file Perform the similar steps and cut copy rename delete the file Tip The operation corresponds to the Windows concept 4 ...

Page 125: ...igital modulation data dm_iqd tdm Control List Data to control digital modulation dm_iqc Settings Digital modulation settings dm User Standard Digital modulation user standard dm_stu User Mapping Digital modulation user mapping vam User Filter Digital modulation user filter vaf NRP Settings Settings NRP Settings nrp Fading Fading Fading data fad GSM EDGE Settings GSM EDGE settings gsm Slot User de...

Page 126: ... lte_tdd Settings User defined IQ File iqw GPS Settings Complete setting of the GPS A GPS menu gps Settings GPS Almanac Settings txt alm al3 Settings GPS Waypoints File txt Settings GPS Generated Almanac File rs_al rs_yuma Settings GPS Ionospheric File rs_ion Settings GPS Navigation Data rs_nav Settings GPS UTC File rs_utc rs_acq FM Stereo Settings Complete setting of the FM Stereo menu fmstereo S...

Page 127: ... the cursor with the rotary knob Pressing the rotary knob Enter Pressing the rotary knob confirms an entry it has the same function as the ENTER key Arrow keys Arrow keys Moves the cursor 1 dB m ALT F12 Confirms entries in the base unit and values with out a unit Selects dBm for the RF level and dB for level offset and level step width Enters a period decimal point Enters a special character A a s...

Page 128: ... Switches modulation on off MOD OFF is indica ted in the status line TOGGLE CTRL T Switches a block or parameter on off Toggles between the different possibilities of set ting a selection parameter PRESET CTRL P Restores a defined basic instrument setup REARR CTRL A Adjusts the size of the active menu to use the whole height of the dislay RECALCULATE CTRL C Starts recalculation of the signal RF ON...

Page 129: ...Manual Operation R S SMBV100A 114 Operating Manual 1176 8016 02 17 Legend of Front Panel Controls ...

Page 130: ...locks I Q Mod and AWGN IMP The remaining and largest part of the chapter describes the functions used for the internal generation of the signals in the baseband these functions are provided in the Baseband block The general instrument settings include various functions such as Setting a defined basic setup using the PRESET key see Chapter 5 2 2 Default Instrument Settings Preset Key on page 118 Sw...

Page 131: ...rments via the I Q OUT outputs AWGN IMP function block Impairment is also possible during I Q modulation I Q Mod function block Impairing the signal see Chapter 5 7 1 Impairments on page 303 Adding noise see Chapter 5 7 2 AWGN Noise Generator on page 308 The baseband signal is available at the I O outputs Output of the baseband signal see Chapter 5 7 3 Output of the Baseband Signal I Q Out on page...

Page 132: ...l Standard 1xEV DO Digital standard IEEE 802 11 a b g WLAN see description Digital Standard IEEE 802 11 a b g WLAN Digital standard IEEE 802 11n WLAN N see description Digital Standard IEEE 802 11n WLAN N Digital standard IEEE 802 16 WiMAX see description Digital Standard IEEE 802 16 WiMAX Digital Standard EUTRA LTE see description Digital Standard EUTRA LTE Satelite Navigation GNSS see descriptio...

Page 133: ... 2 Default Instrument Settings Preset Key The PRESET key performs a defined instrument setup All parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument set tings provide a reproducible initial basis for further settings However functions concerning the integration of the instrument in a measurement setup are not changed for example the GPIB address...

Page 134: ...ttings regardless of the cur rently set operating mode or measurement It contains information on the insstrument s equipment and comprises all settings for the general configuration of the instrument and its interfaces To access the Setup menu press the SETUP key The Setup menu is divided into functional sections as follows System covers general instrument parameters Test used to perform function ...

Page 135: ...ent equipment are either described in the Service Manual of the instrument or they require to be per formed by a Rohde Schwarz service center Risk of invalid adjustment Wait until the instrument has reached its operating temperature before you start the adjustment procedure The warm up time is 30 minutes When to perform adjustments It is recommended to perform internal adjustments prior to any app...

Page 136: ... settling time and the signal quality Remote command CALibration hw LEVel MEASure on page 547 Adjust I Q Modulator Current Frequency Starts the adjustment for the I Q modulator for the currently set frequency I Q swap and baseband gain The I Q modulator is adjusted with respect to carrier leakage I Q imbalance and quadrature Adjustment for only the set frequency is considerably faster than adjustm...

Page 137: ...enu is a table that lists the installed assemblies It is divided into the sections Common Assembly RF Assembly Baseband Assembly Operation Time h Displays the operation time in hours Remote command DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe on page 551 Power On Count Displays the number of power on Remote command DIAGnostic INFO POCount on page 551 Assembly The tables list the installed assemblies Assembly Assembly na...

Page 138: ...er stage is also described in the service manual Most hardware options need to be installed at an authorized Rohde Schwarz service shop To access the Software Options dialog select System and press the SETUP or MENU key The menu is divided into the following sections Firmware Hardware Options Software Options WinIQSIM Loaded Modules Firmware The firmware section of the menu shows the firmware vers...

Page 139: ...open source software packages and the corresponding verbatim license texts 5 2 3 4 Manage License Keys This dialog is the central dialog for managing licenses like enabling newly purchased and or newly registered options or performing the required instrument related steps during the process of unregistration and or moving of licenses An option is ready to operate after it is enabled by means of a ...

Page 140: ... the description of the whole process 1 Open your browser an go to https extranet rohde schwarz com service Select Manage Licenses Move Portable License The first step requires the Device IDs of the source and target instruments 2 To find out the Device IDs proceed as follow a On the source instrument select Setup Manage License Keys Device ID b On the target instrument select Setup Manage License...

Page 141: ...vation key and save it to file 5 On the source instrument select Setup Manage License Keys Import License Keys from File and select the transferred deactivation key 6 On the source instrument select Manage License Keys Export Deactivation Response to File The instrument confirms the deactivation of the option The deactivation key response is exported under the selected name e g K40_portable_decat ...

Page 142: ...rce instrument 8 In the Manage Licenses Move Portable License go to step Create License to generate a license key for this portable option and the selected target instrument Download the license key as a file and transfer it to the target instrument 9 In the target instrument select Setup Manage License Keys Import License Keys from File and select the created license key file The portable option ...

Page 143: ...le This key is required during the unregistration process In case the unregistered option is a portable one it can be afterwards registered at another instrument see Example Moving a portable license on page 125 Status Information Displays status information Show Inactive Licenses Enables disables the display of the inactive expire licenses in the License Table Show Deactivated Licenses Enables di...

Page 144: ...rwards registered at another instrument see Example Moving a portable license on page 125 Option Displays the option short designation Tip Open the Setup Software Options dialog to retrieve more information about the installed options License Count Displays the number of the licenses for the selected option key License Type Display the type of license A license type is a joint qualification for th...

Page 145: ...sors 2 Select the respective sensor e g R S NRP Z81 3 Select Downloads Firmware and the offered firmware suitable for your sensor 4 Transfer and save the firmware on the instruments for example in the var user directory 5 Connect the sensor to the R S SMBV and select Setup System NRP Z Info Update to open the dialog 6 Select the sensor in the left sensor selection field 7 Select the update file wi...

Page 146: ...e sensor dur ing the process the button Rescue appears Thus you can restart the update proc ess Prerequisite is that no other sensor is connected to the instrument Refer to How to update an R S NRP sensor on page 130 and How to restart an interrupted update of an R S NRP sensor on page 130 for detailed instructions Remote command n a 5 2 3 6 Delete Temporary Files During signal processing the R S ...

Page 147: ...p Display Update dialog provides the possibility to switch off update of the displayed parameters in order to increase speed for certain settings The indicated values are not updated and may therefore differ from the intern used values Display Update is On Off Switches on off update of the displayed parameters Switching off the update of the displayed parameters increases the speed for certain set...

Page 148: ...ess the actual signal level at the RF output is 50 dBm This value is not indicated in the status bar Remote command TEST hw ALL STARt on page 840 TEST hw ALL RESult on page 840 Active External IQ Device Selects the external IQ device IQ IN IQ Out Remote command n a 5 2 3 9 Check Front Panel With the functions provided in this dialog you can verify the functionality of the control keys of the R S S...

Page 149: ...anel The test is only com pleted when you have veryfied all keys During the test the actual functions of the keys are disabled Proceed as follows 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select Test Check Front Panel The Check Front Panel dialog opens 3 Press a key on the front panel Check if the corresponding key in the Check Front Panel dialog turns green 4 Press the same key a second time Check that the key in ...

Page 150: ...wn and Rebooting the Instrument The POWER ON STANDBY front panel key switches the instrument from the standby to the ready state or vice versa In remote operation form a remote computer or in manual control the R S SMBV provides you with another possibility to shut the instru ment down or to reboot the system To access the required settings select Setup Environment Shut Down Remote control command...

Page 151: ...e time setting corresponds to the selected Time Zone Remote command SYSTem TIME on page 838 Time Zone Selects the time zone You can select the time zone according to the major cities on the respective conti nents Note By typing the first letter you can quickly navigate through the lists to find the desired destination Remote command SYSTem TIME ZONE on page 838 SYSTem TIME ZONE CATalog on page 838...

Page 152: ...strument in the network The remote commands required to remotely configure the network are described in Chapter 7 18 SYSTem Subsystem on page 821 Network Status Indicates that the instrument is connected to the network Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork STATus on page 831 Hostname Displays the host name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned host name a logical name which can be used...

Page 153: ...nt of the IP address via DHCP or APIPA Zeroconf in order to use this function Static Enables you to assign the IP address manually Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE on page 829 IP Address Displays the IP address By default the R S SMBV is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and to obtain the whole address information automatically If the network does not support D...

Page 154: ...on The DNS server contains the underlying numerical values that are required for name resolution of the host name as part of the IP address To select the DNS server manually select Address Mode Static Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress DNS on page 829 MAC Address Indicates the MAC Media Access Control address a unique identifier of the network adapter in the R S SMBV Remote comman...

Page 155: ...r Clock Input Sets the high low threshold in volts for the trigger and clock signal inputs of the base band section The setting affects the TRIGGER input and the CLOCK IN OUT connectors BNC con nectors at the rear of the instrument Remote command SOURce INPut TRIGger LEVel on page 744 Impedance Trigger Input Selects the input impedance for the external trigger inputs 1 kOhm GND should be selected ...

Page 156: ...rising edge of the trigger signal Negative activates the falling edge of the trigger signal Remote command SOURce INPut TRIGger SLOPe on page 744 Clock Input Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of an externally applied symbol clock pulse This setting affects the CLOCK input BNC connector Remote command CLOCk INPut SLOPe on page 549 Automatic Delay Compensation While working in a master sla...

Page 157: ...Lay CLENgth ch on page 745 5 2 3 14 Display Keyboard Settings In the Display Keyboard Settings dialog the power save mode and external keyboard settings are made It is opened using the SETUP or MENU key under Environment Screen Saver Active Activates deactivates the screen save mode of the display If activated the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of the Wait ...

Page 158: ...rfaces GPIB channel address Sets the address of the GPIB channel the instrument is connected to Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess on page 828 RS232 using USB adapter Remote control via a serial interface is possible via a USB The controller and the instrument must be connected with the external USB serial adapter R S TS1 USB see recommended extras in the data sheet and a serial c...

Page 159: ...YSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource on page 831 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource on page 833 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RESource on page 831 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource on page 832 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource on page 832 Goto Local Switches the instrument to operate in local control mode Switching from remote to local control mode can be also done with one of the following actions manuall...

Page 160: ... the corresponding remote control command of the simulated instrument If you emulate an HP generator for example the HP command EX returns to the SCPI command set To access this dialog press the SETUP or MENU key and select Remote Instru ment Emulations The Instrument Emulations dialog enables you to emulate a remote control com mand set of several other signal generators The remote commands requi...

Page 161: ...page 834 user defined mode OPT String Indicates the option string of the instrument as queried with the common command OPT In User defined see Mode IDN String you can create a user defined option string in addition to the automatically created one Remote command OPT on page 506 SYSTem ORESponse on page 835 5 2 3 17 Protection This Protection dialog provides access to the unlocking of different pro...

Page 162: ...ss the selftests The password is 123456 Remote command SYSTem PROTect ch STATe on page 836 5 2 3 18 Security The security concept of the R S SMBV helps you to protect your instrument against uncontrolled access and changes All provided security services require that you enter the security password Provided security services are Password management secures controlled user access to the instrument W...

Page 163: ...t via Bluetooth Changing the password for the operating system or the security password requires that you enter the old password the new password and that you confirm the new pass word To assign the password press the Accept button This action can not be undone Keep also in mind that security settings are never reset even if you perform a factory preset To access this dialog press the SETUP or MEN...

Page 164: ... Password Confirms the new user password by reperating Note The new password will not be assigned until you select the Change Password button Change Password Change User Password Changes the user password accordingly Note Keep in mind that a changed password is never reset even if you perform a factory preset Change Security Password Enables you to change and confirm the security password Old Pass...

Page 165: ...il you enter the Security Password and confirm with Accept Enable LAN Services individually LAN Services Enables or disables the following interface services individually SCPI over LAN activates access over LAN to remotely control the instrument using SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments com mands VNC activates access via VNC Virtual Network Computing interface a graphical desktop s...

Page 166: ...with Accept Volatile Mode Acitivates write protection on the file system to prevent modification or erasure of val uable data Note The setting will not be assigned until you enter the Security Password confirm with Accept and reboot the instrument Remote command SYSTem SECurity VOLMode STATe on page 827 Annotation Frequency Enables disables the display of the currently used frequency in the header...

Page 167: ...ngs and processes for exam ple when you operate the instrument via remote control The function disables the keys at the front panel of the instrument the external mouse and keyboard The instrument indicates the locked controls by a padlock softkey in the taskbar Disabled Locks the display and all controls for the manual operation of the instrument This security feature protects the instrument agai...

Page 168: ...rity password before connecting the instrument to the network All settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Accept Applies the modified settings provided the security password is entered correctly Note This action can not be undone Keep in mind that a changed password is never reset even if you perform a factory preset Bluetooth Pin Sets the Bluetooth pin of an external Bluetoo...

Page 169: ...MF menu Network settings including hostname Setup menu Remote channel settings including GPIB address Setup menu Start Stop display update Setup menu Display and keyboard settings Setup menu To maintain security password settings and all settings protected by these passwords like disabled USB and LAN connections are not changed Not affected by the Factory Preset are also user data lists or instrum...

Page 170: ...ual control The current command must be fully processed before the mode is switched other wise the instrument switches immediately back to remote control REM LLO The LOCAL key is locked inititated by the LLO local lockout command The instrument can be switched from remote state to local state only via remote control for example with GTR or the Visual Basic command CALL IBLOC generator The LOCAL ke...

Page 171: ...are already offered in the Hard Copy dialog All con figuration parameters are available in File Options on page 157 Automatic Naming Activates automatic generation of the file name Automatic naming is configured in the Options sub dialog see File Options on page 157 Remote command HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO STATe on page 561 File Info Indicates the file name The file name can be entered either manually ...

Page 172: ...les following the activated components Path Selects the directory Note To select the destination path you have to specify a file name as well Otherwise an error message is displayed and the selection is canceled Directory path and file name are displayed in the infoline right to the Path button Remote command HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory on page 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO on page 558 Clear Path De...

Page 173: ...arting with number 0 the output direc tory is scanned for already existing files As long as files with the same name are existing the number is increased by 1 The number is automatically set so that the resulting file name will be unique within the selected path The current number is not in the save recall file but will be temporarily stored within the database At following save oper ations the nu...

Page 174: ...tain the selected entry The index has an alphabetical structure and also contains all GPIB commands Find The find function allows you to look for freely selectable terms in all help pages A list of the pages containing the entered term is displayed as the search result The search can be limited to words in the page title to increase the number of hits To maximize the Topics window you can hide the...

Page 175: ...or to activate settings which are not supported by the instrument Network settings and remote settings are not saved and restored Lists are saved and loaded in the appropriate menus For example the user cor rection data list is created and saved in the User Correction menu When loading an instrument setting it is possible to select whether the current fre quency and level setting is to be retained...

Page 176: ...ngs files define a folder these files are to be stored in or navigate through the file system The name of the dialog is context sensitive but the provided functions are self explana tory and very similar With the provided settings you can perform the following to navigate through the file system use the directory tree to create a new file load and store files use the dedicated functions New Select...

Page 177: ...y the Preset function Remote command SOURce hw BB DM SETTing STORe FAST on page 685 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SETTing STORe FAST on page 632 refer to the description of frimware options for the syntax of the corresponding SCPI commands Save Immediate x Saves the current instrument setting in one of the three intermediate memories These instrument settings are retained until a different instr...

Page 178: ... file management functions like create new directories move copy delete files and or directories use the standard File Manager function see File Manager on page 162 Remote command to list all files in a directory MMEMory CDIRectory on page 568 MMEMory CATalog on page 567 refer to the description of firmware options for the syntax of the corresponding SCPI command SOURce hw BB Digital Standard SETT...

Page 179: ... setting in which a sweep was activated is saved the sweep is started when the recall command is called If an instrument setting which accesses lists is saved this list is also loaded If the list has been deleted in the meantime an error message appears when the instrument setting is loaded If the list has been overwritten in the meantime the new entries will be used A message appears if no instru...

Page 180: ...this generic standard function each time you perform one of the following store or load settings files define a folder these files are to be stored in or navigate through the file system The name of the dialog is context sensitive but the provided functions are self explana tory and very similar With the provided settings you can perform the following to navigate through the file system use the di...

Page 181: ...age 364 Functions for handling of control lists Provided are the following standard functions for file handling Select Select and load the file Remote command SOURce hw BB DM CLISt SELect on page 678 New Creates new file with the specified name To edit the file content select File Select Edit Edit Access the Control List Editor and loads the selected file for editing see Control and Marker List Ed...

Page 182: ... type to be listed If you select a file type with a specific file extension only files with this extension are listed in the directory Remote command n a Directory and File Name Selects the directory in which the file to be deleted or copied is located The dialog lists all files in this directory Selected files are highlighted The path is indicated above the directory window Unlike the Save Recall...

Page 183: ...tion of the file Remote command MMEMory DELete on page 573 Create New Directory Creates a new directory The name of the new directory can be entered in the New Directory dialog Note When the subdirectory is entered it is possible to enter an absolute path name e g var user MEAS or the path relative to the current directory e g MEAS The directory is created as a subdirectory in the selected level R...

Page 184: ... selected network folder Password Enter the password of the selected user Reconnect at Startup Enables reconnecting every time you start up the instrument Connect Triggers the instrument to prove the credential and to map i e connect the selected network folder or computer to the instrument You can map up to 10 network folders Change Applies the changes Disconnect Disconnects the network drive 5 2...

Page 185: ... samba see LAN Services on page 150 3 Select Setup Environmen Network settings and select a Address Mode Auto DHCP b Check that the DNS Suffix and DNS Server are correct 4 Press the SAVE RCL key 5 In the Save Recall dialog select File Manager Map Network Share 6 In the Map Network Share dialog perform the following settings a In the Network Folder field enter IP Address share or Server Name share ...

Page 186: ...zes automatically a connected memory stick Connect the instrument to a LAN For information on how to set up a LAN connection refer to Chapter 2 6 Setting Up a Network LAN Connection on page 43 An instrument connected to a LAN supports the standard file transfer methods from a remote client FTP file transfer protocol see To access the file system of the R S SMBV via ftp on page 172 File sharing acc...

Page 187: ... address field enter ftp IP Address of the Instrument e g ftp 10 113 10 105 A log on dialog opens and requests a password Tip Default password The FTP file access use the user instrument with default password instrument It is highly recommended that you change the user password in the Security dia log before connecting the instrument to the network See Chapter 5 2 3 18 Security on page 147 5 Enter...

Page 188: ...er field enter IP Address of the Instrument share or Hostname of the Instrument share e g 10 113 10 105 share c Select Finish A log on dialog opens and requests an user name and a password 4 Enter the user name and the password of your instrument The default user name and password is instrument Tip Default password The SAMBA SMB file access use the user instrument with default password instrument ...

Page 189: ...e curves makes it possible to compare various signals i e by comparing the CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function with different channelization codes or the spectra if different filter parameters are selected The displayed signal segment can be influenced by selecting the trigger that defines the time for recording to start With automatic triggering the signal is tapped at the point i...

Page 190: ...At the bottom of each graphics window there are several buttons for freezing and zooming the display and for activating a reference curve For more information see Chapter 5 3 2 Bar of Graphics Window on page 177 Remote command SOURce hw BB GRAPhics STATe on page 688 Smart Graphics Activates the smart graphics The graphic is displayed in a small window which is roughly the size of a block These win...

Page 191: ...e only if Code Domain 3GPP FDD DL is selected Sets the scrambling code if the Code Domain display is selected Since it is possible to select a different scrambling code in the menu for each of the 4 base stations and it is also possible to display an external signal the scrambling code for which the display is to be generated must be explicitly specified here Remote command n a Sample Rate Mode Se...

Page 192: ...reezes the current display Clicking the button again reactivates the normal permanently updated display Freezing the display allows it to be analyzed more easily Zooming the display at the same time permits detailed evaluation of any signal segment Remote command n a Zoom In only possible with mouse The mouse can be used to freely select any section to be zoomed This section is selected by pressin...

Page 193: ...ence curves The reference curves must be defined beforehand using the Copy to Ref button Remote command n a Copy to ref Defines the current curve as the reference curve A window opens in which the curve can be given a comment and a color First of all the desired color is highlighted in the top window If this color has already been assigned to a reference curve this curve is overwritten The command...

Page 194: ...ber of reference curves displayed simultaneously Assign Defines the current curve as the reference curve The new reference curve is shown together with the entered com ment next to the selected color in the display area Remote command n a 5 3 3 Signal Displays All signal displays which are used for analyzing a baseband signal can be selected A number of signal displays are only available if the co...

Page 195: ...tor Diagram The Q component is displayed over the I component in the vector diagram Each point is determined by a vector The amplitudes of the signal components scaled to the peak envelope power PEP are plotted on the X and Y axis minimum scaled amplitude 1 maximum scaled amplitude 1 This display shows the curves between the various states of modulation mapping The recording depth is 1 kSamples Th...

Page 196: ...the user and the addition of noise This display shows the various states of modulation mapping which occur in the signal The example shows the constellation diagram of a QPSK modulation signal 5 3 3 4 Eye Diagram The eye diagram displays synchronized and superimposed sections of either the inphase or quadrature components of the signal The display width eye length is set at 2 symbols several hundr...

Page 197: ...tput of the baseband main module Impairment func tion block i e contained in the displayed signal is impairment of the signal as defined by the user and the addition of noise 5 3 3 6 Power Spectrum With the spectrum display the signal spectrum is calculated from the I Q signal by means of Fast Fourier Transform FFT The power density over frequency is displayed The power density is plotted on the Y...

Page 198: ...ator allows you to check if the BER and BLER measurements work properly see Chapter 5 4 13 2 Test Generator Settings on page 204 5 4 1 Test Setup The following figure shows the test setup for the bit block error rate measurement The data for the DUT can be generated by the R S SMBV or a user defined external source The R S SMBV can also generate an externally computed modulation signal e g created...

Page 199: ...equences are repeated periodically depending on the selected polyno mial A randomly selected initial status yields exactly one subsequent status The initial status and therefore the subsequent status occur only once in the whole sequence Hence an advantage of the PRBS data is that the bit error detector must know only the polynomial but not the entire sequence At measurement start the feedback shi...

Page 200: ...n real time If sig nals complying with digital standards are generated or if ARB waveforms are used a marker signal can be used as a clock As the DUT causes a delay the ratio of clock to data transmission times must always be considered and checked with an oscilloscope if necessary The R S SMBV indicates the status of the clock and data lines and of the synchronization in the menus 5 4 5 Ending th...

Page 201: ...f the ran dom sequence is 2 to the power of the degree of the polynomial minus 1 For example PRBS9 length of 511 29 equals 512 minus 1 5 4 7 Restart Function The Restart function allows BER measurements with short signals or with signals that are not continuously generated and therefore do not contain any whole number multi ples of PRBS sequences An external signal at the BERT input halts the meas...

Page 202: ... the Data Enable signal Figure 5 4 TDMA signal with user data that contains the PRBS data sequence and various check fields which can be ignored for the bit error rate measurement Below that are the associated clock and data enable signals In the case of the block error rate measurement the Data Enable signal masks the user data see Figure 5 5 Figure 5 5 Data enable signal with block error rate me...

Page 203: ... bits were set to 0 by the DUT These 50 bits plus the preceding 0 are ignored in the bit error rate measurement 5 4 10 Bit Error Rate Settings Access Select Baseband MISC Bit Error Rate The Bit Error Rate dialog contains all the parameters to configure activate and evaluate the measurement Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements ...

Page 204: ...2 Bit Error Rate Displays the measured bit error rate The bit error rate is the ratio of occurred errors to transmitted data bits The display unit can be selected in the box to the right of the value ENG The bit error rate is output in exponential notation with the exponent 3 or 6 SCI The bit error rate is output in scientific notation i e standardized to one place to the left of the decimal The b...

Page 205: ...signal is detected No Clock The applied clock signal is not detected Possible causes are The clock recovery is not available e g with tests of RF compo nents If the signal is generated by the R S SMBV the bit clock can be extracted from the CLOCK output connector only with Custom Dig Mod signals in real time If signals complying with other digi tal standards are generated or if ARB waveforms are u...

Page 206: ...the PRBS cannot synchronize Note that an inversion of the output signal specified for some cases by the PRBS stan dard is performed automatically upon PRBS selection Manual inversion of the data signal is therefore not required No sync status and an error rate of approx 50 A bit error occurs during synchronization e g nine data bits with PRBS9 The BER measurement is set up incorrectly This fault i...

Page 207: ...ted by clicking the Execute Single button If a measurement is in progress the current values for Bit Error Rate Errors and Data Bits are cyclically displayed The measure ment is terminated when either or both of the termination criteria have been reached To start a new measurement the Execute Single button must be clicked again Remote command BERT SEQuence on page 536 Max Data Bits Sets the number...

Page 208: ...S is selected Data Polarity remains unaffected Remote command BERT SETup TYPE on page 541 Data Polarity Sets the polarity of the feedback data bits Note Standard compliant data inversion for PRBS15 and PRBS23 is performed auto matically when the PRBS is selected Data Polarity remains unaffected Norm High level stands for logic 1 low level for logic 0 Inv Low level stands for logic 1 high level for...

Page 209: ...ated internally This setting is suitable for PRBS sequences that run continuously and thus ensure uninterrupted repetition Remote command BERT SETup RESTart STATe on page 541 Data Enable Activates the use of the Data Enable signal and sets the polarity of this signal if it is used The Data Enable signal determines the data to be evaluated for the BER measure ment Any data in addition to the PRBS s...

Page 210: ...e time the measure ment terminates immediately when the restart signal is applied None of the 32 bits within the Pattern Ignore detector is evaluated If Data Enable and Pattern Ignore are active at the same time Data Enable is given priority i e bits that are not enabled are not examined for 0 or 1 sequences Off Pattern ignore is not active All 1 Bit sequences consisting of 32 or more consecutive ...

Page 211: ...ng connectors see 5 4 11 Block Error Rate Settings Access Select Baseband MISC Block Error Rate The Block Error Rate dialog contains all the parameters to configure activate and evaluate the measurement The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 7 5 BERT and BLER Subsystems on page 532 5 4 11 1 General Settings State 197 Block Error Rate 197 Received Blocks 197 ...

Page 212: ... output in scientific notation i e standardized to one place to the left of the decimal The block error rate is output in percent ppm The block error rate is output in parts per million Remote command BLER UNIT on page 543 Received Blocks Displays the current number of checked data blocks Remote command BLER RESult on page 534 Errors Displays the current number of occurred errors Remote command BL...

Page 213: ... is not available e g with tests of RF compo nents If the signal is generated using the instrument family the bit clock can be extracted from the CLOCK output connector only with Custom Dig Mod signals in real time If signals complying with other digital standards are generated or if ARB waveforms are used a marker signal can be used as a clock As the DUT causes a delay the ratio of clock to data ...

Page 214: ...uto Continuous measurement of block error rate If either or both of the termination criteria are met the current mea surement is terminated and immediately a new one is started auto matically Depending on the settings made a measurement can take considerable time During the first measurement intermediate results are displayed For the measurements that follow only the final results are shown The pa...

Page 215: ...elatively quickly if the error rate is high The measurement result is statistically reliable since many errors were already coun ted If the measurement is terminated because the number of block errors entered here was reached Number of Errors appears to the right of Terminated By Remote command BLER SETup MERRor on page 540 BLER Type Displays the CRC polynomial used CCITT CRC 16 G x x16 x12 x5 x1 ...

Page 216: ...hreshold high low in volts for the input signals Clock Data Data Enable and Restart The variable threshold enables you to align in puts with the level of different signals In addition reflections and other interference can be suppressed by selecting the appro priate threshold Remote command SOURce INPut BERT THReshold on page 544 Impedance Sets the input impedance of the input signals Clock Data D...

Page 217: ...connector receives the clock signal Data Enable Shows the mapping of the data enable control signal to the NEXT connector Restart Shows the mapping of the restart signal to the MARKER 2 for BER tests The BLER test does not use this control signal 5 4 13 Test Generator The BER BLER test generator is a selftest that enables you to validate the BER and BLER measurements The selftest is a protected fu...

Page 218: ...nual 1176 8016 02 17 Test Generator Setup 203 Test Generator Settings 204 BER BLER Functionality Test 206 5 4 13 1 Test Generator Setup The test setup requires that you loop back the signals as shown in Figure 5 7 Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements ...

Page 219: ...T connector 6 TRIG connector To establish the connections 1 Connect MARKER 1 and TRIG 1 6 for data signal loopback 2 Connect MARKER 2 and NEXT 2 5 to loop back the data enable or the restart signal 3 Connect CLOCK OUT and CLOCK IN 3 4 to loop back the clock signal 5 4 13 2 Test Generator Settings Access Select Baseband MISC Bit Error Rate Block Error Rate Bit and Block Error Rate Measurements ...

Page 220: ... the error bit pattern This parameter allows you to specify defined error bits to check whether the BER BLER function detects the error properly Remote command TEST BB DATA ERRor RATE on page 841 Trigger Selects the trigger input mode Not Used Ignores the data enable and restart signals The test generator acquires all input data Data Enable Acquires all input data within the measurement interval d...

Page 221: ... tester Proceed in the same way for the block error rate test It is assumed that Protection level 1 is unlocked for accessing the test generator see To enable the BER BLER test generator on page 202 The bit error rate dialog is accessed see Chapter 5 4 10 Bit Error Rate Settings on page 188 The cabling for the selftest is established see Chapter 5 4 13 1 Test Generator Setup on page 203 The test g...

Page 222: ...s of the menu with the same name which is opened using the MENU key The function block is available for the basic unit R S SMBV frequency option with out additional equipment options 5 5 1 1 RF Output Basically the RF output signal is deactivated The previous state is restored when the signal is reactivated Activating RF Signal Output If the settings for the RF signal are done you can activate RF ...

Page 223: ...Mod block Remote command OUTPut hw STATe on page 578 5 5 1 2 RF Signal Modes and Characteristics The CW Sweep and List modes are available for generating the RF signal CW The RF signal is generated with the set frequency and level This is the default mode Sweep The RF signal is generated as a sweep with the set parameters It is not possible to activate frequency level and LF sweep simultaneously L...

Page 224: ...n the Frequency Phase dialog Note that the displayed RF frequency in the header and the RF output frequency entered in the Frequency Phase dialog can be different as explained in the following section 5 5 2 1 RF Frequency vs RF Output Frequency If you are working with a downstream instrument e g a mixer or a frequency multiplier you can enter the related parameter value in the frequency settings d...

Page 225: ... and multiplier factor are considered in the frequency value Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed on page 736 5 5 2 3 RF Frequency Dialog The combined RF Frequency Phase dialog contains the parameters required for configuring the frequency and settings like a frequency offset or a multiplier factor of an externally connected multiplier see Chapter 5 5 2 4 Frequency Settings on page 210 Furt...

Page 226: ...l display in the status bar The display has been disabled for security reasons See Annotation Frequency Annotation Amplitude The display is disabled when list mode is running see State List Mode on page 289 Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed on page 736 Note This command sets the frequency of the FREQ display that is the frequency containing offset Offset Sets the frequency offset relativ...

Page 227: ...ters determine the step size for adjusting the frequency with the rotary knob Variation Active Activates the user defined step width used when varying the frequency value with the rotary knob ON The frequency value set with the rotary knob is varied using the user defined step width which is entered under Variation Step OFF The frequency value set with the rotary knob is varied in steps of one uni...

Page 228: ...enerator Remote command SOURce hw PHASe on page 781 Reset Delta Phase Display Resets delta phase value The set phase is adopted as the new current phase i e the delta phase value is reset to 0 Remote command SOURce hw PHASe REFerence on page 782 5 5 4 Reference Oscillator The R S SMBV is equipped with an internal reference oscillator that generates a refer ence frequency of 10 MHz It is used as in...

Page 229: ...frequency you can directly pass it to the output The signal quality remains the same Figure 5 9 Synchronizing instruments by means of an externally applied reference signal having 10 MHz Settings Source External External Reference Frequency 10 MHz Set the additionally provided parameters as for example the synchronization band width according to the requirements of the application External fref 5 ...

Page 230: ...access the settings dialog for configuring the reference signal perform one of the following In the block diagram select RF A Mod config RF Frequency Reference Oscillator Press the MENU key and select RF A Mod RF Frequency Reference Oscilla tor Press the SETUP key and select Setup System Reference Oscillator In the Reference Oscillator Settings dialog you can select the signal source and fre quenc...

Page 231: ...o improper RF signal due to the missing external refer ence signal is used for measurements A message indicates that the external signal is missing and the RF output is deactivated This setting is not affected by a reset Remote command SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal RFOFf STATe on page 804 External Reference Frequency Determines the frequency of the external reference signal You can select an externa...

Page 232: ...lows a distribution of the local oscillator signal in way that multiple RF signals can be driven by the same LO signal This is mandatory for mini mizing the phase drift between these RF signals The LO Coupling function is available only for instruments equipped with the option R S SMBV B90 Phase Coherence The R S SMBV outputs its local oscillator signal at the LO OUT connector rear of instrument I...

Page 233: ...the same for all carriers a stable phase between the RF signals can be achieved 5 5 5 2 Typical Applications The LO Coupling function can be used to generate a beamformed signal Generation of a beamformed signal with two instruments working in External mode 5 5 5 3 LO Coupling Settings To open the LO Coupling dialog select RF A Mod Configure LO Coupling or use the MENU key under RF A Mod The menu ...

Page 234: ... the LO OUT connector in order to couple two instruments Off The LO OUT signal is switched off Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency LOSCillator OUTPut STATe on page 736 5 5 6 RF Level 5 5 6 1 Overview of RF Level Message Level overrange underrange If this message appears in the status line the following parameter is in the overrange see data sheet The set level Level The displayed peak envelope powe...

Page 235: ... Level EMF dialog The instrument activates the Level Offset icon in the status bar when a level offset is set The correlation is as follows Level in header RF output level Level in menu Level offset Offset in menu The RF output is protected against overloading by an external signal applied to the RF output see Chapter 5 5 10 Reverse Power Protection on page 240 Setting the RF level To change the R...

Page 236: ...unit keys are labeled with these units Note The SCPI command sets the level of the Level display i e an entered level off set is considered in the level value Remote command SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude on page 788 5 5 6 2 RF Level Dialog Access Select RF A Mod config RF Level Level Attenuator The offset free level level offset and level limit are set in the top section of the dia log...

Page 237: ...e level mode for signal output This function allows you to optimize the RF output signal for applications where improved harmonic suppression or a low Signal to Noise ratio is required Note The modes Low Distortion and Low Noise for improving harmonic suppres sion or the S N ratio require that an attenuator is fitted Normal The generator provides an RF output signal with high signal to noise ratio...

Page 238: ...et PRESET key RST and the Save Recall function It is influenced only by the Factory Preset and the factory value is equal to maximum level Remote command SOURce hw POWer LIMit AMPLitude on page 789 Offset Level Sets the level offset relative to the RF level The level offset of a downstream instrument for example an attenuator or amplifier is entered The entry does not change the value of the RF le...

Page 239: ...r on page 576 OUTPut hw AFIXed RANGe LOWer on page 575 RF OFF Mode Selects the attenuator mode when the RF signal is switched off The setting of the RF OFF mode is not affected by an instrument preset PRESET key RST and the Save Recall function This parameter is influenced only by the Factory Preset Unchanged Freezes the setting of the attenuator when RF is switched off The attenuator is only acti...

Page 240: ...values with an R S NRP power sensor and use these values for the external level correction This feature is a protected function see Service Manual chapter 2 Adjustment Adjustment Data Indicates what data has been used for level calibration Remote command CALibration hw LEVel EXTern DATA on page 548 5 5 6 3 Power On EMF Settings The power on behavior of the R S SMBV and the level display in the dis...

Page 241: ...default However some operating modes exclude ALC as the control loop would detect incorrect values and result in level devi ations These are Pulse modulation I Q modulation Also note that ALC may detect incorrect values in multi transmitter test setups If mul tiple generators are coupled reverse power may affect the ALC readings Based on incorrect values ALC would have an impact on the signal to i...

Page 242: ...l is decreased by 30 dB a mechanical step attenuator The level control status is permanently displayed as a status message in the info line 5 5 7 1 Automatic Level Control Settings To open the Automatic Level Control dialog select RF A Mod Configure Automatic Level Control or use the MENU key under RF A Mod The combined dialog ALC UCOR is divided into the several sections and provides access to th...

Page 243: ...ear interpolation This functionality enables faster level adjustments since the output signal is not interrupted by the measurement and also not disturbed Remote command SOURce hw POWer ALC OMODe on page 786 Remote command SOURce hw POWer ALC STATe on page 787 Search Once ALC Forces the generator to execute level adjustment once although the Sample Hold mode is active Remote command SOURce hw POWe...

Page 244: ...output frequency to the con nected R S NRP Zxx power sensor which in turn requests the signal generator to adjust the output level according to its measurement In contrast to this real time con trol loop for example the list operating mode already generates the RF output signal on previously optimized frequency and level value pairs In this case the NRP Z Level Control as a second control loop wou...

Page 245: ...P Z power sensor for power control Note In remote control the sensors are set up using the SENSe commands The remote measurement is triggered by the READ query which also provides the measure ment results The software version of the connected power sensor can be retrieved by means of the remote control command SENS POW TYPE Use the Setup Chapter 5 2 3 5 NRP Z Info Update on page 129 dialog to upda...

Page 246: ...m the power sensor This proceeding keeps the thermal equilibrium and the zeroing process also compensates the noise that superimposes the measured signal e g from a broadband amplifier Remote command SENSe ch POWer ZERO on page 588 Target Level Specifies the nominal level expected at the input of the sensor The signal generator adjusts the output power accordingly in order to meet the target value...

Page 247: ...ction The User Correction function is used to create and activate lists in which level correc tion values predefined by the user are freely assigned to RF frequencies Correction is performed by the user defined table values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency With frequencies which are not contained in the list the level correction is determined by interpolation of the ...

Page 248: ...figure User Correction or use the MENU key under RF A Mod The combined menu ALC UCOR is divided into the several sections The top sections provide access to the level and attenuator settings see Chap ter 5 5 6 2 RF Level Dialog on page 221 and to the automatic level control settings see Chapter 5 5 7 Automatic Level Control ALC on page 226 User Correction Settings The User Correction settings are ...

Page 249: ...ly after filling both columns frequency and level otherwise the entries are lost Frequency Hz Enters the frequency to which the level correction value applies Note The Fill function allows to automatically enter any number of frequencies with freely selectable range and increment Using the Fill With Sensor function of the Edit sub menu requires only the entry of the frequency values The level valu...

Page 250: ...ete Row Deletes the marked row Delete Range Allows to delete any number of rows starting with the marked row The number of rows to be deleted can be defined in an entry window Save as Open the file menu to save the list under a new name Note Save list only after filling both columns frequency and level otherwise the entries are lost Each list is saved to the R S SMBV hard disk as a separate file w...

Page 251: ...e hw CORRection DEXChange MODE on page 728 Extension User Correction Selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Selection TXT text file or CSV Excel file is available Remote command SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe EXTension on page 726 Decimal Point User Correction Selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating p...

Page 252: ...ected the ASCII file is imported as user correction list When export is selected the user correction list is exported into the selected ASCII file Remote command SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange EXECute on page 728 5 5 9 2 Filling the Correction List automatically The Fill Table menu enables you to automatically set the level correction values The start line and the number of rows to be filled are d...

Page 253: ...with values starting with the start value and using the set increment Remote command n a 5 5 9 3 Filling the Correction List with Power Sensor Measurement Data The level correction values for the user correction list can be acquired by means of R S NRP power sensors The R S NRP sensors are connected to either the SENSOR connector or to one of the USB interfaces Configuration of the connection is p...

Page 254: ...To select the sensor and determine its parameters refer to Chapter 5 5 11 1 NRP Z Power Viewer on page 240 To fill the table press the Execute button Fill User Correction Data with Sensor Enables you to fill the table with correction data acquired by a connected power sensor from Rohde Schwarz Sensor Displays connected sensors for selection List To Fill Indicates the used list file Include Zeroing...

Page 255: ...reverse power protection is tripped when the power of the external signal becomes too high A relay opens and interrupts the internal connection to the RF output This condition is indicated in the display header by the OVERLOAD status message Overload If an Overload status message is indicated in the display header reset the overload protection by pressing the RF ON OFF key The RF input is activate...

Page 256: ... R S SMBV either with the R S NRP Z2 extension cable or via USB with the adapter cable R S NRP Z4 See also the R S website http www rohde schwarz com in section Power Meters Voltmeters R S NRP Z Sensors for information on the sensor hub and the available accessories The instrument automatically detects a connected R S NRP Z power sensor and indi cates it in the NRP Z Power Viewer dialog Each conne...

Page 257: ...y disables NRP Z Level Control and vice versa The software version of the connected power sensor can be retrieved by means of the remote control command SENSe ch POWer TYPE on page 588 Use the Chapter 5 2 3 5 NRP Z Info Update on page 129 dialog to update the sensor software NRP Z Power Viewer automatically disables NRP Z Level Control and vice versa NRP Z Power Viewer Settings To access the dialo...

Page 258: ...ich also provides the measurement results The sensor is selected by suffix 1 2 3 or 4 in key word SENSe or READ of the com mand header Suffix 1 denotes the sensor connected to SENSOR suffix 2 the one at the first USB interface and suffix 3 and 4 are assigned to the sensors at the following USB interfa ces The suffix is identical to the index which is assigned automatically to each sensor upon conn...

Page 259: ...With certain power sensors only for example R S NRP Z81 Indicates the measured peak level value with the selected unit Remote command READ ch POWer on page 580 Level Avg Indicates the measured level value with the selected unit Remote command READ ch POWer on page 580 Unit Selects the unit used for result display The power sensor provides the measured value in Watt In which unit the measured value...

Page 260: ...efer to the documentation of your power sensor for more information Tips for zeroing When to perform zeroing During warm up after switching on or connecting the instrument After a substantial change of the ambient temperature After fastening the power sensor module to an RF connector at high temperature After several hours of operation When low power signals are to be measured e g less than 10 dB ...

Page 261: ...t but rather that it takes longer for the result to settle when the power changes Measurements are continuously repeated in a predefined time window The measure ment result is obtained by averaging the measured values for the last 2N time win dows The number N is the filter length the factor of 2 arises because the output sig nals from the microwave detector to suppress low frequency noise are cho...

Page 262: ...ard deviations does not exceed the specified noise content The desired noise content is entered in the entry field to the right see Noise Content To avoid very long settling times when the power is low the averag ing factor can be limited with the Timeout parameter Remote command SENSe ch POWer FILTer TYPE on page 584 Filter Length Filter Indicates the used filter length for filter type Auto or Us...

Page 263: ...Device STATe on page 581 Enable Logging Activates recording of R S NRP Z power sensor readings If enabled every value measured by a connected power sensor and indicated in the user interface is written to a log file Per measurement the function logs the measured value 2 readings when you work with peak sensors the sensor type and the mea surement time time stamp The function automatically creates ...

Page 264: ...by means of the menu with the same name which is opened using the MENU key Enabling Disabling Analog Modulations using the MOD On Off Key The MOD ON OFF key switches the modulations on and off MOD ON OFF Press the MOD ON OFF key to enable disable analog modulations Pressing the key again restores the status that was active before the last switch off MOD OFF is displayed in the info line of the hea...

Page 265: ...es The table shows the modulations and operating modes which can be activated simulta neously or which deactivate each other AM FM PhiM Pulse I Q Amplitude modulation AM Frequency modulation FM Phase modulation PhiM Pulse modulation Vector modulation I Q compatible with reduced AM modulation performance 5 5 12 2 Amplitude Modulation AM An internal or external source can be selected for amplitude m...

Page 266: ... of the dialog or in the LF Output dialog internal source only These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation source State Activates amplitude modulation Activation of AM deactivates I Q modulation arbitrary waveform generation digital modulation digital standards Remote command SOURce hw AM STATe on page 591 AM Source Selects the source for the AM modulation signal Internal U...

Page 267: ...te The installed hardware determines the available settings Use the Hardware Config dialog to check the hardware the instrument is equipped with For information on the required hardware revision refer to the release notes Remote command SOURce LFOutput SHAPe on page 766 AM Sensitivity Displays the input sensitivity of the externally applied modulation signal at the EXT MOD input in V The modulatio...

Page 268: ...ation modes is possible Normal mode with full setting range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation Low Noise mode with better signal noise ratio but reduced setting range for mod ulation bandwidth High Deviation mode with full setting range for FM deviation and a reduced set ting range for modulation bandwidth see data sheet It is not possible to use frequency modulation simultaneously with pha...

Page 269: ...al Uses both the internal and externally applied modulation signal for example to perform two tone FM Remote command SOURce hw FM SOURce on page 733 FM Mode Selects the mode for the frequency modulation Normal The maximum range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is available Low Noise Frequency modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode The ranges of modulatio...

Page 270: ...OURce hw FM DEViation on page 731 SOURce hw FM INTernal DEViation on page 732 SOURce hw FM EXTernal DEViation on page 732 LF Gen Freq Sets the frequency of the LF generator This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal modulation source Remote command SOURce LFOutput FREQuency on page 758 LF Gen Shape Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal Note The ins...

Page 271: ...rnal only Sets the impedance for the external modulation signal applied at the EXT MOD con nector You can select 600 Ohm or high 100 kOhm This setting affects all analog modulations which use the external modulation signal Remote command SOURce hw INPut MODext IMPedance on page 743 5 5 12 4 Phase Modulation PhiM It is not possible to use phase modulation simultaneously with frequency modulation Se...

Page 272: ... and the modula tion switched on The modulation source can be selected independently for the differ ent modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is per formed in the lower section of the dialog internal source only These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation sources State Activates ɸM modulation Activati...

Page 273: ...e 784 ɸM Deviation Sets the modulation deviation in RAD The maximum deviation depends on the set RF frequency and the selected modulation mode see data sheet If the entered deviation is too high for the set RF frequency the instrument provides the maximum value and displays an error message The same applies if the RF fre quency is set to a value at which the deviation cannot be determined The devi...

Page 274: ...e 784 Mod External Coupling Selects the coupling mode AC or DC for the external modulation signal Note Coupling for external feed via input EXT MOD can be set independently for all modulations using the external modulation signal AC Disconnects the DC voltage component and uses only the AC com ponent of the modulation signal DC Uses the modulation signal with both components AC and DC Remote comma...

Page 275: ...vel The level modulator is set directly However to correct the output level the R S SMBV executes a Sample Hold mea surement after each change of frequency or level settings The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample Hold measurement Pulse Modulation Settings To open the Pulse Modulation menu select RF A Mod Configure Pulse Modula tion or use the MENU key under RF A Mod In the upper section of ...

Page 276: ...e characteristics and the trigger are offered in the Pulse Generator section of the Pulse Modulation menu External Uses an externally applied modulation signal The external modulation signal is input via the EXT MOD connector Remote command SOURce hw PULM SOURce on page 801 Polarity External Source only Selects the polarity of the modulation signal Normal The RF signal is On while the level is hig...

Page 277: ... 2 LF Output To open the LF Generator Output dialog select RF A Mod Configure LF Generator Output or use the MENU key under RF A Mod The dialog provides access to the configuration of the internal modulation genera tors and you can activate the output of the LF signal The available settings depend on the source selected and on the installed options Alternatively you can perform the settings also i...

Page 278: ...cy of the LF generator This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal modulation source Remote command SOURce LFOutput FREQuency on page 758 LF Gen Shape Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal Note The installed hardware determines the available settings Use the Hardware Config dialog to check the hardware the instrument is equipped with For information...

Page 279: ...tivates the LF frequency sweep signal generation Note Activating a sweep mode automatically deactivates other sweeps and the list mode Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MODE on page 759 Mode Selects the LF frequency sweep mode If you change the sweep mode during the execution the signal generator stops the sweep and starts with the next trigger event at the initial value The Reset Sweep ...

Page 280: ...LFO SWE FREQ SPAC LIN SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN 1E34 SOUR LFO FREQ MAN 12 kHz The value entered with command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN LOG sets the step width The value entered with command SOUR LFO FREQ MAN has no effect the command only sets the next sweep step In remote control only a step by step sweep from start to stop frequency is possible Extern Single Generates a single sweep cycle when...

Page 281: ...the con nectors for the external trigger signal input see Chapter 2 2 Rear Panel Tour on page 28 Example SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIG0 SWE SOUR EAUT SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE External trigger Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency MODE on page 762 TRIGger hw SWEep SOURce on page 847 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MODE on page 759 Execute Single Sweep Starts a sweep manually This trigger ...

Page 282: ...als Linear Takes the frequency value entered as an absolute value in Hz Logarithmic Takes the value entered as a lograithmic value that means as a con stant fraction of teh current frequency in Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing on page 764 Shape Selects the waveform shape of the sweep signal Sawtooth The sweep runs from the start to the stop frequency Each subse quent sweep...

Page 283: ...LF Sweep Sets the step width for the individual frequency sweep steps At each step this value is added to the current frequency Depending on the Spacing mode you have set the corresponding parameter is dis played Step Lin The step width is a constant value in Hz Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear on page 765 Step Log The step width is determined logarithmically in that m...

Page 284: ...apter 5 2 3 7 Display Update on page 132 Remote command SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELl on page 761 Ext Trigger Input Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of an externally applied instrument trigger This setting affects the TRIG input BNC connector at the rear of the instrument Positive activates the rising edge of the trigger signal Negative activates the falling edge of the trigg...

Page 285: ... VIDEO connector The signal output and the pulse generator are automatically switched on with activation of pulse modulation if pulse generator is selected as modulation source The signal output can be switched off subsequently Remote command SOURce hw PGENerator STATe on page 781 Pulse Mode Pulse Generator Sets the mode of the pulse generator Single A single pulse is generated in one pulse period...

Page 286: ...tarts The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse generation Remote command SOURce hw PULM DELay on page 798 Double Pulse Width Pulse Generator Double Pulse only Sets the width of the second pulse Remote command SOURce hw PULM DOUBle WIDTh on page 799 Double Pulse Delay Pulse Generator Double Pulse only Sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse Remote ...

Page 287: ...Indicates the external trigger signal The positive slope is active Channel 2 Indicates the sync signal The sync signal starts after a trigger delay of typically 50 ns see specifications Channel 3 Indicates the pulse signal The pulse signal starts after the set pulse delay of 100 ns Note The sync signal is output at the PULSE SYNC connector and the pulse signal at the PULSE VIDEO connector Example ...

Page 288: ...e pulse generation is without effect Channel 2 Indicates the sync signal The sync signal starts after a trigger delay of typically 50 ns see specifications Channel 3 Indicates the double pulse signal The first pulse starts without a delay The second pulse starts after the set double pulse delay time between start of first pulse to start of second pulse Note The sync signal is output at the PULSE S...

Page 289: ... The sync signal starts after a trigger delay of typically 50 ns see specifications It is repeated after the set pulse period of 300 ns as long as the gate signal is active Channel 3 Indicates the pulse signal The first pulse starts after the pulse delay of 100 ns The second pulse starts after the set pulse period Remote command SOURce hw PULM TRIGger MODE on page 802 External Trigger Input Slope ...

Page 290: ... signal at the output high while the signal settles low when it is stable valid cleared Generates a single pulse at the beginning of a pulse sequence e g to synchronize pulse modulation Remote command SOURce hw PULM OUTPut SYNC STATe on page 799 5 5 14 RF Sweep and List Mode 5 5 14 1 Overview The R S SMBV offers three different sweep types frequency sweep level sweep and LF sweep to be activated a...

Page 291: ...ee Chapter 5 2 3 7 Display Update on page 132 5 5 14 2 RF Frequency Sweep The dialog enables you to activate and configure a sweep for the RF frequency To open the RF Frequency Sweep dialog select RF A Mod Configure RF Fre quency Sweep or use the MENU key under RF A Mod In the top section of the dialog the RF sweep is activated and the sweep mode is selected The buttons are used to reset the RF sw...

Page 292: ...nd SOURce hw FREQuency MODE on page 738 Mode RF Frequency Sweep Selects the RF frequency sweep mode If you change the sweep mode during the execution the signal generator stops the sweep and starts with the next trigger event at the initial value The Reset Sweep button sets the sweep to the start value Auto Generates a continuously repeating sweep signal immediately after activating the sweep mode...

Page 293: ...r Current Freq Frequency Sweep You can directly enter the value but also use the UP and DOWN navigation keys or the ROTARY KNOB You can determine the step width below in the entry field Step Lin or Step Log see Step Lin Log Frequency Sweep If a step is out of the sweep range Start Freq or Stop Freq it is ignored Note To step through the sweep frequencies in remote control mode use the FREQ MAN com...

Page 294: ... trigger signal The step width corresponds to the step width set for the rotary knob Example SOUR SWE FREQ MODE STEP SOUR SWE FREQ SPAC LIN SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN 1MHz TRIG FSW SOUR EXT SOUR FREQ MODE SWE External trigger Extern Start Stop Generates a continuously repeating sweep signal that is started stopped and restarted by subseqeunt external trigger events The sweep steps are performed automa...

Page 295: ...STOP on page 740 Center Freq Frequency Sweep Sets the center frequency Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency CENTer on page 735 Span Frequency Sweep Sets the span Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency SPAN on page 739 Current Freq Frequency Sweep Displays the current frequency In sweep Step mode the parameter is editable and you can enter frequency for the next step Remote command SOURce hw FREQuency MA...

Page 296: ...mbles a triangle Each subse quent sweep starts at the start frequency Remote command SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency SHAPe on page 810 Retrace RF Frequency Sweep Activates that the signal changes to the start frequency value while it is waiting for the next trigger event You can enable this feature when you are working with sawtooth shapes in sweep mode Single or External Single see Mode RF Frequency Sw...

Page 297: ... slope from start_f to stop_f Remote command SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic on page 812 Dwell Time Frequency Sweep Sets the dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of the individual sweep steps The Dwell Time set by the user is used as the step time of the sweep The effective net dwell time is shorter reduced by the setting time This setting time may be greater than the time ...

Page 298: ...weep mode is selected The buttons are used to reset the level sweep all sweep modes or to execute the level sweep Single mode The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section State Level Sweep Activates Level Sweep mode Note Activating a sweep mode automatically deactivates other sweeps and the list mode Remote command SOURce hw POWer MODE on page 791 Mode Level Sweep Sel...

Page 299: ...on of the value in the Current Level entry window The step width is set below at entry field Step If this mode is activated the cursor moves to the value displayed for Current Level If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Step mode the current sweep is stopped The step sweep starts at the current level value Example SOUR SWE POW MODE MAN TRI PSW SOUR SING SOUR SWE POW STEP 0 5 SOUR PO...

Page 300: ...E SWE External trigger Extern Start Stop Sets an automatically repeated sweep cycle that is started stopped and restartet by subsequent external trigger events The first external trigger signal starts the sweep Start The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current fre quency Stop The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start fre quency Start Refer to the descripti...

Page 301: ...he start level Remote command SOURce hw POWer STARt on page 794 Stop Level Level Sweep Sets the stop level Remote command SOURce hw POWer STOP on page 796 Current Level Level Sweep Displays the current level If Step is set the level for the next level step of the sweep is entered here Remote command SOURce hw POWer MANual on page 790 Shape RF Level Sweep Selects the cycle mode for a sweep sequence...

Page 302: ...ternal Single see Mode Level Sweep Remote command SOURce hw SWEep POWer RETRace on page 815 Step Level Sweep Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps This entry is effective for all sweep modes With the level sweep the logarithmic step width is a constant fraction of the current level This fraction is added to the current level The logarithmic step width is entered in dB Remote command S...

Page 303: ...744 5 5 14 4 List Mode Similar to a sweep a series of previously defined frequency and level points is pro cessed in List mode In contrast to a sweep however a list with freely selectable value pairs frequency and level can be created The value range for frequency and level covers the entire configurable value range of the instrument Interactions between List mode and other operating modes or sett...

Page 304: ... list is processed from the beginning to the end of the list modes Auto Exter nal Single External Step List Mode Dialog To open the List Mode menu select RF A Mod Configure List Mode or use the MENU key under RF A Mod The menu is used to activate deactivate the operating mode List to create select and activate the lists and to select the trigger mode and the dwell time General Settings State List ...

Page 305: ...to the value displayed for Cur rent Index It is now possible to scroll up and down in the list in dis crete steps by varying the index The duration of a list step is deter mined by the time between two index entries Button Reset restarts the list at the starting point Extern Single Single cycle from the beginning to the end of the list as with Single but started by an external trigger The external...

Page 306: ...horter reduced by the setting time This setting time may be greater than the time specified in the data sheet Remote command SOURce hw LIST DWELl on page 774 Current Index List Mode Sets the list index in Step mode Remote command SOURce hw LIST INDex on page 775 Learn List Mode Data List Mode Starts the determination of the hardware setting for the selected list The data deter mined in this way is...

Page 307: ...he editor for editing the selected list A list consists of any number of frequency level value pairs The currently selected list is displayed Frequency Hz Enter the frequency of the frequency power value pair Remote command SOURce hw LIST FREQuency on page 774 Power dBm Enter the level of the frequency power value pair Remote command SOURce hw LIST POWer on page 777 Goto Selects row for editing If...

Page 308: ...user selectable Save The list is saved under its current name List Range In List Mode Defines an index range in the current list by setting the start and stop index Only the values in the selected index range are processed in List mode all other list entries are ignored Remote command SOURce hw LIST INDex STARt on page 776 SOURce hw LIST INDex STOP on page 776 Ext Trigger Input Slope Sets the pola...

Page 309: ...file or CSV Excel file is available Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe EXTension on page 771 Decimal Point List Mode Selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point numerals Remote command SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal on page 772 Column Separator List Mode Selects the separator between the frequency and level c...

Page 310: ... EXECute on page 772 Filling the List Mode Data automatically The Fill List Mode Data menu enables you to automatically set the values in the List Mode table The start line and the number of rows to be filled are defined under From and Range The column to be filled is selected under Select column to fill Depending on the selection here the default for start end and increment value are set As the s...

Page 311: ...ies Remote command n a Increment value Sets the increment for the frequency or the level entries Remote command n a Fill Fills the selected column in the set range with values starting with the start value and using the set increment Remote command n a 5 6 I Q Modulation I Q Mod Block The R S SMBV offers I Q modulation with external analog I Q signals external digital signals internal digital sign...

Page 312: ... in the Baseband function block see Chapter 5 9 Baseband Signal Baseband Block on page 323 Before the sig nal is fed into the I Q modulator noise can be added and or the signal can be impaired Impairment at this point along the signal flow is offered to allow a signal to be output at the I Q OUT outputs a signal which for example compensates signal distortion in a connected test object DUT Impairm...

Page 313: ... modulation parameters select I Q Mod Config ure I Q Settings or use the MENU key System error correction of the I Q modulator permits precise and repeatable measure ments The correction routine should be called in the case of temperature fluctuations of several degrees To call the routine press the SETUP key and select System Internal Adjustment and execute the desired adjustment procedure It is ...

Page 314: ...signal must be applied at the inputs I and Q Internal Base band I Q In Selects the internal baseband signal as the input signal This setting requires the additional equipment options for generating the various baseband signals Remote command SOURce hw IQ SOURce on page 748 State I Q Mod Activates deactivates I Q modulation If Analog Wideband I Q In is selected the I Q modulator is also deactivated...

Page 315: ... offset completely offset 0 percent For more information see Chapter 5 7 1 2 I and Q Offset on page 304 Remote command SOURce hw IQ IMPairment LEAKage I on page 747 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment LEAKage Q on page 747 Gain Imbalance I Q Mod Sets the imbalance of the I and Q vector see Chapter 5 7 1 1 Gain and Gain Imbal ance on page 303 The entry is made in dB default or where 1 dB offset is roughly 12 a...

Page 316: ...l communication standards except IS95 and IS2000 In the final step the filtered I Q signal is modulated to the desired RF in a different way in the I Q modulator Figure 5 12 Definition of I Q modulator in IS2000 and R S SMBV f According to IS2000 the RF signal s t is derived from the baseband I Q signal as fol lows s t i t cos 2pifct q t sin 2pifct The instrument family is based on the following d...

Page 317: ...voltage at the I Q input is equated to the peak power and is used as the reference for setting the level of the output signal Since the signal does not usually supply the peak power at a constant level and instead supplies a lower average power the crest factor specifies how many dB have to be added internally so that the correct output power is achieved Remote command SOURce hw IQ CREStfactor on ...

Page 318: ...ta Every data sample is modified in the same way Impairment of the digital I Q signal can be used to compensate the distortion of a test object check the effect of a disturbed signal on a test object if the internal compensation of signal distortion is deactivated by the I Q modulator also to test its own baseband components In addition to impairment of the digital I Q signal the R S SMBV also all...

Page 319: ...e is shown on Fig ure 5 14 Figure 5 14 Negative gain imbalance left and positive gain imbalance right in the I Q constellation diagram 5 7 1 2 I and Q Offset An I offset adds a constant value to all I amplitudes leaving the Q amplitudes unchanged A Q offset has the opposite effect A combination of I and Q values results in an I Q offset which is due to carrier feedthrough in the I Q modulator Poss...

Page 320: ...ive quadrature offset results in a phase angle greater than 90 degrees The effect of a positive quadrature offset in the I Q con stellation diagram is shown on Figure 5 16 Figure 5 16 Positive quadrature offset in the I Q constellation diagram 5 7 1 4 Impairment Settings Menu To access the Impairment Settings menu for setting the digital I Q impairments select AWGN IMP Configure I Q Impairements o...

Page 321: ...ulator is not influenced by this set ting Remote command SOURce hw BB IMPairment STATe on page 692 I Q Offset Digital Impairments Sets the carrier leakage in percent of the amplitudes scaled to the peak envelope power PEP for the I and or Q signal component An ideal I Q modulator suppresses the carrier leakage completely offset 0 percent For more information see Chapter 5 7 1 2 I and Q Offset on p...

Page 322: ...MPairment SKEW on page 691 IQ Delay Sets the time delay of both I and Q vectors relative to the selected trigger and marker or relative to the other instrument s working in the master slave synchronous mode see Chapter 5 9 2 4 Synchronous Signal Generation on page 329 A positive value means that the I and Q vectors delay relative to the marker trigger or to the other instrument and vice versa Remo...

Page 323: ...pical applications for the noise generator are bit error or block error measurements depending on the set S N or C N ratio The Gaussian noise is generated by means of feedback shift registers with subsequent probability transformation The switching configuration is such that virtually ideal statis tical characteristics are achieved I and Q paths are decorrelated from each other The crest factor of...

Page 324: ...n the Noise power Configuration And Output Results section In Additive Noise and CW interferer mode the interfering power can be defined and the resulting total power displayed here In Noise Only mode only the noise power can be set here AWGN Settings The RFI signal generator is activated the mode selected and the interfering signal is configured in the top section of the menu State AWGN Activates...

Page 325: ...outside the set system bandwidth Remote command SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth on page 592 Minimum Noise System Bandwidth Ratio AWGN Additive Noise and Noise Only Sets the ratio of minimum noise bandwidth to system bandwidth Note The noise signal is not generated arbitrarily for a particular bandwidth but instead it is generated in steps Noise therefore also occurs outside the set system bandwidth With thi...

Page 326: ...the resolution is limi ted to 0 7 Hz Tip The desired frequency constellation can be precisely set with an accuracy of up to 0 01 Hz by selecting a suitable frequency offset of the baseband source e g Custom Dig Mod and by correcting the RF frequency by the difference between Resulting and Target CW Frequency Remote command SOURce hw AWGN FREQuency RESult on page 595 Noise Power Configuration And O...

Page 327: ... kept constant and the noise power is adjusted This is the standard proce dure for measuring the bit error rate versus the noise power Noise If the C N value or Eb N0 value changes the noise power is kept con stant and the carrier power is adjusted Some test cases of 3GPP Base Station Tests TS 25 141 specify for example that the noise power be permanently set as a function of the base station powe...

Page 328: ...ier Reference Mode this entry determines the noise power and hence the power of the output signal that means the carrier noise signal It does not affect the power of the useful signal The carrier power is kept constant In Noise Reference Mode this entry determines the power of the useful signal i e the carrier power The noise power is kept constant The power of the noise signal which is derived fr...

Page 329: ...value Carrier Reference Mode Displays the power of the noise signal in the system bandwidth The power of the noise signal is derived from the entered C N or S N or Eb N0 value The carrier power is entered under Carrier Power respectively the power is dis played under Carrier Power CW Interferer mode Noise Reference Mode Sets the power of the interfering signal The power of the carrier is derived f...

Page 330: ...Display Mode AWGN Consequently the overall power of the measured signals is composed of different signals and is also represented in dif ferent units dBm or dB full scale Remote command SOURce hw AWGN POWer SUM on page 598 Carrier Noise PEP Signal Noise PEP Total Bandwidth Carrier Interferer PEP Signal Interferer PEP Additive Noise and CW Interferer Displays the peak envelope power of the overall ...

Page 331: ...8 Digital I Q Output Settings on page 320 for description 5 7 3 1 I Q Out Settings Menu The settings dialogs for the analog signal output are available in the block diagram in the AWGN IMP function block as well as in the menu with the same name which is opened using the MENU key Selecting the menu item I Q Out Settings opens a dialog with the parameters for the I Q output signal The settings dial...

Page 332: ...erential non inverted mode The menu changes depending on the selected output mode Differential Differential output at I OUT and I OUT BAR or Q OUT and Q OUT BAR Single Ended Single ended output at I OUT and Q OUT Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog TYPE on page 752 Mode Selects the mode for setting the outputs independent or together The menu changes depending on the selection here Fixed The...

Page 333: ...e command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut LEVel on page 751 Digital Attenuation Var Attenuated mode Attenuates the level of the baseband and the RF signal Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog POWer DATTenuation on page 752 Couple IQ Bias Variable output mode only Activates deactivates coupling of bias setting of the I signal and Q signal component For activated coupling the setting can be made for the I ...

Page 334: ...lf of the value in positive direction at the non invert ing outputs in negative direction at the inverting outputs respectively For example if a 100 0 mV offset value is set for the I signal component the output signal at I OUT will have a 50 0 mV offset and the output signal at I OUT Bar will have a 50 0mV offset A negative offset is set with half of the value in negative direction at the non inv...

Page 335: ...le in the BB In Out function block as well as in the menu with the same name which is opened using the MENU key To access the settings for the digital I Q output 1 select Block Diagram BB In Out Config Baseband Output Settings or 2 press the MENU key and select BB In Out Baseband Output Settings 5 8 1 Digital I Q Output General Settings State Digital I Q Output Switches On Off the digital I Q outp...

Page 336: ...vel type Peak Level or Level can be selected Set Level Via Selects the level type peak level level that is used to set the signal level The entry field is activated in the status bar and the value can be edited directly Either the Peak Level or the Level entry field can be edited in a path The level entry fields and the corresponding units are displayed in the status bar Peak Level The signal leve...

Page 337: ...on page 756 Variation Step Digital I Q Out Sets the user defined step width for entering the level value using the rotary knob Level variation with this step width must be activated with Variation Active ON Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIGital POWer STEP INCRement on page 755 5 8 5 Signal Monitoring The section Signal Monitoring indicates digital signal clipping Overflow Digital I Q Out Indi...

Page 338: ...ission is active this parame ter indicates the ID of an externally connected Rohde Schwarz instrument Remote command SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIGital CDEVice on page 753 5 9 Baseband Signal Baseband Block The R S SMBV provides you with the ability to generate digital modulation signals in accordance with the definitions in the digital standards or with user definable charac teristics Signals are genera...

Page 339: ...upper part of the Baseband dialog is used for selecting digital standards digital modulation and waveform generation These menus are described in the respective chapters relating to the modulation systems The lower part of the Baseband dialog can be used to define a frequency and phase offset Frequency Offset Enters the frequency offset for the baseband signal The frequency offset shifts the baseb...

Page 340: ...ure 5 18 3GPP FDD signal chip rate 3 84 Mcps root cosine filter 0 22 The complex useful bandwidth of filtered signal is calculated as follows fuse 1 Roll Off Factor Symbol Rate fuse 1 0 22 3 84 MHz 4 6848 MHz For instrument with a total available I Q bandwidth of 120 MHz the valid range of val ues for the frequency offset is then 120MHz 2 4 6848MHz 2 foffset 120MHz 2 4 6848MHz 2 or 57 6576MHz foff...

Page 341: ...ources The selection in the digital menus at any given time depends on the parameter and stan dard concerned and is clear from the selection list offered in the dialog The external data sources may therefore not be available in certain cases Characteristics which are uniquely specific to particular standards are described in the corresponding manual The following input signals are used when digita...

Page 342: ...g shift registers with feedback points determined by the polynomial By way of example the diagram below shows a 9 bit generator with feedback to regis ters 4 and 0 output Figure 5 20 9 bit PRBS generator For PRBS15 and PRBS23 a CCITT V 52 compliant data inversion is performed in the feedback path automatically as shown below The pseudo random sequence from a PRBS generator is uniquely defined by t...

Page 343: ... menu via the List Management or Data List Management button The maximum length of a data list is determined by the size of the data list memory see data sheet There is no restriction on the number of lists that can be stored 5 9 2 3 Clock Signals The clock reference used for generating the timing pulse can be either internal or external Clock Source selection from the menu Internal External To en...

Page 344: ...ust not be selected Clock Source External The symbol rate set must not deviate from the symbol rate of the external signal by more than 2 see also data sheet 5 9 2 4 Synchronous Signal Generation Different simulation schemes such as MIMO for instance require the generation of two or more very precise synchronized signals in the baseband and the RF domain Two or more instruments are denoted as perf...

Page 345: ...utputs of the previous one 2 Connect the output CLK OUT of the master instrument to the signal input CLK IN of the slave one Note From firmware version 2 05 269 on the trigger information is modulated on the clock signal and no additional cabling is necessary For older firmware versions however a connection between the output MARKER 1 of the master instrument and the signal input TRIG of the slave...

Page 346: ...tings are available in the Clock Settings section of the Cus tom Digital Modulation menu ARB menu and in each of the Clock Settings menus of the installed digital standards The Clock Settings menu are described in the Trig ger Marker Clock Settings on page 388 and in the respectively section Trigger Marker Clock of the installed digital standards To easy the configuration an automatically adjustme...

Page 347: ... the parameter if the master instrument provides the slaves with its internal trigger signal b In case a common external trigger signal is provided for the master and the slave instrument s the state of this parameter in all instruments has to match SCPI Command BB DM TRIG EXT SYNC OUTP OFF 3 Set the Sync Mode to Sync Slave SCPI Command BB DM CLOC SYNC MODE SLAV 4 Perform Set Synchronization Setti...

Page 348: ...ternally standard GSM signal high 1 modulation mode GMSK and signal low 0 modulation mode 8PSK EDGE The CW control signal and the signals for power ramping are generated internally Power Ramping and Level Attenuation The R S SMBV uses the two control signals Burst Gate and Lev_Att to trigger the power ramping and level attenuation functions The instrument internally generates control signals as co...

Page 349: ...tings on the Generated Signal The Figure 5 22 explains the power ramping function in principle The Burst Gate sig nal defines the start of the rising and falling edges of the envelope of the output signal and the Lev Att signal defines the start and end of level attenuation The signal level during the attenuation period is a configurable value Figure 5 22 Signal behavior when power ramping and lev...

Page 350: ...ts for the next trigger to start signal generation anew The status of signal generation Running or Stopped is displayed for all trigger modes in the corresponding trigger menu of the digital standard currently switched on The signal generation status particularly with an external trigger can thus be checked Internal and external trigger sources are available for triggering Internally triggering is...

Page 351: ...he start of a particular modulation symbol can be marked Two marker outputs are available Marker Connector Location Markers 1 2 MARKER 1 2 BNC connectors rear panel Marker Modes Marker mode restart The generated marker signal is a single On pulse The rising edge of this pulse is generated at the signal generation start as well as at each subsequent signal restart time This marker can be used to mo...

Page 352: ...creased to 2 3 4 symbol periods Marker mode pattern Periodic marker where each period is defined by a bit pattern with a maximum length of 64 bits A 1 0 in the pattern denotes an On Off signal segment with a duration of one sample symbol period Example In the following example the marker signal is defined by a pattern 100100 Marker mode ON OFF ratio Similar to Pulse but with independent lengths of...

Page 353: ...es are pre measured internally so that the displayed values match the true values in the signal When external signals are used they are replaced by PRBS data during pre measurement 5 9 3 2 Modulation Types Custom Digital Mod The available predefined modulation types are ASK amplitude shift keying FSK fre quency shift keying PSK phase shift keying and QAM quadrature amplitude modu lation Additional...

Page 354: ...tion FSK deviation cannot be set since it is permanently set to of the symbol rate Table 5 2 Modulation type and associated mapping ASK 1 bit per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM ASK PSK BPSK 1 bit per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM BPSK QPSK 2 bits per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM QPSK QPSK 45 Offset 2 bits per symbol 45 rotation SOUR BB DM FORM QPSK45 QPSK EDGE 2 bits per symbol 3pi 4 rotation SOUR BB DM FORM QEDGe AQP...

Page 355: ...al coding pi 4 rotation SOUR BB DM FORM P4DQ pi 8 D8PSK 3 bits per symbol Differential coding pi 8 rotation SOUR BB DM FORM P8D8 8PSK 3 bits per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM PSK8 8PSK EDGE 3pi 8 8PSK 3 bits per symbol Edge coding 3pi 8 rotation SOUR BB DM FORM P8ED QAM 16QAM 4 bits per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM QAM16 16QAM EDGE 4 bits per symbol pi 4 rotation SOUR BB DM FORM QAM16EDge 32QAM 5 bits per symb...

Page 356: ...tion SOUR BB DM FORM QAM32EDge 64QAM 6 bits per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM QAM64 128QAM 7 bits per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM QAM128 256QAM 8 bits per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM QAM256 1024QAM 10 bits per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM QAM1024 4096QAM 12 bits per symbol SOUR BB DM FORM QAM4096 FSK Baseband Signal Baseband Block ...

Page 357: ...ion of nearly any arbitrarily chosen constellation diagram The output of mapwiz is a mapping file vam that can be imported on a R S SMBV The program was developed on a 32 bit Microsoft Windows platform under MATLAB For more information refer to the description Introduction to mapwiz Mapping Editor on the Rohde Schwarz Internet page 5 9 3 3 Coding Custom Digital Mod Modulation symbols are coded dir...

Page 358: ...QPSK EDGE X QPSK45 Off set X X X X Pi 4 QPSK X X X Pi 4 DQPSK X X X X 8PSK X X X X X AQPSK X X X X OQPSK X X X X 8PSK_EDGE X Pi 8 D8PSK X X X MSK X X X X X 2FSK X X X X X 4FSK X X X X X 8FSK X X X X 16FSK X X X X 16QAM X X X X X 16QAM EDGE X 32QAM X X X X X 32QAM EDGE X 64QAM X X X X X 128QAM X X X X X 256QAM X X X X X 1024QAM X X X X X Modulation type pi 4DQPSK With differential coding switched o...

Page 359: ...5 45 45 Coding algorithms Common coding types are listed in the following table Table 5 5 Coding algorithms Coding Coding algorithm Applicable for K bit symbol NONE bn an k 1 8 Differential bn an bn 1 modulo 2k k 1 7 Differential Gray Gray coding with additional differ ential coding k 1 7 GSM dcn not dn exor dn 1 k 1 Example Differential coding for QPSK modulation with K 2 bit symbol Decimal displ...

Page 360: ...6 Differential coding according to VDL Modulation symbol dn 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Phase difference 0 45 135 90 270 315 225 180 Phase differential coding INMARSAT and PHASE DIFF correspond to system stand ards Inmarsat M and DVB according to ETS 300 429 The INMARSAT coding can gen erally be used for modulation types with 2 bits symbol such as QPSK It uses the fol lowing algorithm 5 9 3 4 ...

Page 361: ...R BB DM FILT TYPE RCOS SOUR BB DM FILT PAR RCOS 0 99 Gauss FSK B x T SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE GAUS SOUR BB DM FILT PAR GAUS 2 5 Pure Gauss B x T SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE PGA SOUR BB DM FILT PAR PGA 2 5 Gauss Linearized SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE LGA Edge Narrow Pulse Shape SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE ENPShape Edge Wide Pulse Shape SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE EWPShape cdmaOne SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE CONE cdmaOne 705 kHz SOUR BB ...

Page 362: ...E228 cdma2000 3X SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE DM3x APCO25 Roll Off Factor SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE APCO25 SOUR BB DM FILT PAR APC 0 5 APCO25 H CPM SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE APCO25Hcpm APCO25 LSM SOUR BB DM FILT TYPE APCO25Lsm Gauss Cut Off Frequency SOUR BB DM FILT PAR APCO25L GAU S 25000 Gauss Cut Off Frequency SOUR BB DM FILT PAR APC025 LOWP 75000 Baseband Signal Baseband Block ...

Page 363: ...tandards However depending on the selected filter form one or more filter parameters are additionally provided for even precise adjustment of the filter characteristic like more steeper edges or customization the transition bandwidth For more information on the provided settings refer to Impact of the Filter Parame ters on page 348 Impact of the Filter Parameters The following is a simple descript...

Page 364: ...th of a brick like filter The roll off factor affects the steepness of the filter flanks A Rolloff Factor 0 would result in the steepest theoretically possible flanks values near to 1 make the flanks more flat Passband The passband describes the frequency span that the filter passes unchanged The total passband of a filter is given as follows Bandwidth 1 Roll Off Factor Symbol Rate Cut Off Frequen...

Page 365: ...n refer to the description Introduction to filtwiz Filter Editor on the Rohde Schwarz Internet page 5 9 3 5 Conflicting Settings Custom Digital Mod Having selected a modulation procedure not every combination is possible when selecting the settings for the modulation parameters Symbol Rate and Coding These restrictions inevitably give rise to conflicting settings if a parameter is changed and lead...

Page 366: ...default settings and user defined standards The data source is selected and set in the Data Source section The List Management button opens a submenu for calling the data editor and the file manager The middle part of the menu is used for selecting the standard the symbol rate and the coding The modulation type is set in the Modulation section The More button opens a submenu that displays the mapp...

Page 367: ...al modulation turns off all the other digital standards The digital modulation is generated in realtime no precalculated signal and therefore all parameter changes in the ON state directly affect the output signal Remote command SOURce hw BB DM STATe on page 651 Set To Default Calls default settings The values are shown in the following table Parameter Value State Not affected by Set to Default Da...

Page 368: ...page 684 SOURce hw BB DM SETTing LOAD on page 684 SOURce hw BB DM SETTing STORe on page 684 Fast Save Determines whether the instrument performs an absolute or a differential storing of the settings Enable this function to accelerate the saving process by saving only the settings with values different to the default ones Note This function is not affected by the Preset function Remote command SOUR...

Page 369: ... List Select Data Data lists will be used Data lists can be generated internally in the data editor or externally Data lists are selected in the File Select window which is called by means of the Select Data button The File Manager is used to transmit external data lists to the R S SMBV and can be called within every File Select window by means of the File Manager button Remote command SOURce hw B...

Page 370: ... KHz 6 ksym s APCO25 H CPM APCO25 FSK APCOPH2HCpm APCO Phase2 H DQPSK pi 4 DQPSK 6 ksym s Cosine roll off 1 BW 7 2 KHz APCO25 PSK APCOPH2HDQpsk APCO Phase2 H D8PSK Wide pi 8 D8PSK 4 ksym s Cosine roll off 1 BW 7 2 KHz APCO25 8PSK APCOPH2HD8PSKW APCO Phase2 H D8PSK Narrow pi 8 D8PSK 4 ksym s Cosine roll off 1 BW 5 KHz APCO25 8PSK APCOPH2HD8PSKN APCO Phase1 LSM pi 4 DQPSK 4 8 ksym s APCO25 LSM Gauss...

Page 371: ...dard menu the File Select windows for saving and recalling user defined standards and the File Manager can be called User standards are stored as files with the predefined file extension dm_stu The file name and the directory they are stored in are user definable Remote command SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt CATalog on page 685 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt DELete on page 685 SOURce hw BB DM STAN...

Page 372: ... to Off For selection Variable FSK the deviation of each symbol can be set in the More submenu Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FORMat on page 669 Load User Mapping Selects user defined mapping table This opens the Select List File User Mapping window in which the mapping table can be selected see User Mapping on page 342 The button is only available if modulation type USER is selected The button Fi...

Page 373: ...GLe on page 667 More Modulation Type Calls the submenu which displays the mapping of the currently selected modulation type and the digital modulation delay in the case of an external data source The Modulation CW Switching section can be used to enable switching of the signal between modulated and unmodulated In case of selection Variable FSK the FSK type and the deviation for each symbols is set...

Page 374: ... I Q output The value is displayed only if an external synchronous data source is selected In this case the value represents the delay between the active clock edge for data and the corresponding peak I Q value associated with this data item on the I Q connectors Remote command SOURce hw BB DM MDELay on page 670 Current Modulation Type Displays the currently selected modulation type together with ...

Page 375: ...e 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter COSine ROLLoff on page 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter GAUSs on page 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter PGAuss on page 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter RCOSine on page 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter SPHase on page 665 Cut Off Frequency Factor available for filter parameter Lowpass and APCO25 LSM only Sets the value for the cut off frequency f...

Page 376: ...on is only available if filter type USER is selected The button File Manager calls the File Manager menu The File Manager menu is used to display and delete files Remote command SOURce hw BB DM FLISt SELect on page 682 SOURce hw BB DM FLISt CATalog on page 675 SOURce hw BB DM FLISt DELete on page 681 Current Filter Response Displays the filter characteristic of the currently selected filter Remote...

Page 377: ...to select the clock source see Clock Settings on page 377 Remote command n a List Management The List Management menu is called from the Custom Digital Modulation main menu The data and control lists are selected and created in the File Select menu which is called up by means of the Data List and Control List buttons The File Manager is used to copy rename and delete files and to create directorie...

Page 378: ...SELect on page 678 Create Data Control List Creates new data control list This opens the File Select window in which the data control list can be created The file name has to be entered in field File Name The new list contains no data it can be edited in the list editor Remote command SOURce hw BB DM DLISt SELect on page 681 SOURce hw BB DM CLISt SELect on page 678 File Manager Calls the File Mana...

Page 379: ... position on the left side of the first row i e the beginning of the list On the left edge of the editor the last three offset positions are specified at the beginning of the row An existing list can be edited in the insert or overwrite mode Remote command SOURce hw BB DM DLISt SELect on page 681 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DATA on page 679 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DATA APPend on page 680 GoTo Data List Ed...

Page 380: ...of two The hex functions are automati cally assigned to the numeric keys at the front panel Remote command n a Save Data List Data List Editor Saves the changes made to the Data List file selected for editing Remote command n a Control and Marker List Editor The Control and Marker List Editor for editing the selected control list is called up in the List Management submenu of the Custom Digital Mo...

Page 381: ...the signal characteristics are graphically dis played The scaling of the x axis is always adapted to the overall length of the control list to provide constant overview of all defined ramps The ramps can be assigned the exact bit position in the signal by means of The bit scale below the marker control signal characteristic The display of the current cursor position in the Cursor menu section if t...

Page 382: ...r ramp produces a low low or high high transition These ramps are displayed as dashed lines Existing ramps can be shifted after the cursor has been placed on the ramp and Enter has been pressed it then changes colour twice The ramp is shifted by using the cur sor keys or the rotary knob The new position is determined by pressing Enter again Ramps can be deleted by means of the BACKSPACE key after ...

Page 383: ...tains a ramp from low to high and from high to low The ramps are symmetrically shifted around the center of the displayed signal area and can subsequently be shifted as required Ramp Down Up The marker control signal contains a ramp from high to low and from low to high The ramps are symmetrically shifted around the center of the displayed signal area and can subsequently be shifted as required Re...

Page 384: ...r of symbols bits to be displayed Ramps outside the displayed area are not lost by zooming Remote command n a Save Save As Pressing the Save button saves the changes made to the CList file selected for edit ing Selecting the Save As button creates a new control list This opens the Create Lists Files Which Name window in which the control list can be created The file name has to be entered in field...

Page 385: ...d Marker List Editor on page 365 External Digi tal R S SMBV does not support external source for power ramp control Remote command n a Ramp Function Selects the ramp function that describes the shape of the rising and falling edges dur ing power ramp control see Figure 5 23 Linear The transmitted power rises and falls linear fashion Cosine The transmitted power rises and falls with a cosine shaped...

Page 386: ...uring the signal attenuation period during the time the Lev_Att signal is high See also Figure 5 22 For information about the required control signal LEV_ATT refer to Power Ramping and Level Attenuation on page 333 The LEV_ATT control signal is defined in the Control Data Editor Remote command SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp ATTenuation on page 671 Baseband Only Restricts power ramping to the baseband signa...

Page 387: ...section is where the clock source is selected and in the case of an external source the clock type The Global Trigger Clock Settings button leads to a submenu for general trigger clock and external input settings Trigger In The Trigger In section is used to configure the trigger signal for the digital modulation The current status of signal generation is indicated for all trigger modes Trigger Mod...

Page 388: ...ed Displays the status of signal generation for all trigger modes This display appears only when Custom Dig Mod is enabled State On Running The digital modulation signal is generated a trigger was internally or externally initiated in triggered mode If Armed_Auto and Armed_Retrigger have been selected generation of signals can be stopped with the Arm button A new trigger inter nally with Execute T...

Page 389: ...he signal synchronous to the external trigger event For or two or more R S SMBVs configured to work in a master slave mode for syn chronous signal generation configure this parameter depending on the provided sys tem trigger event and the properties of the output signal See Table 5 9 for an overview of the required settings Table 5 9 Typical Applications System Trigger Application Sync Output to E...

Page 390: ...ng of the processing time and starts with sample 0 i e the complete signal is outputted This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequences with signal duration comparable with the processing time of the instrument Remote command SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut on page 655 External Delay Unit Determine whatever the trigger delay is expressed in samples or directly...

Page 391: ... SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal ch INHibit on page 660 Marker Mode Provides the settings necessary to define the marker output signal for synchronizing external instruments Marker x Marker configuration for up to 4 marker channels The settings are used to select the marker mode defining the shape and periodicity of the markers The contents of the dialog change with the selected marker mode the s...

Page 392: ...ted the connecting cables from the master instrument to the slave one and between each two consecutive slave instruments must have the same length and type Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points None The instrument is working in stand alone mode Sync Master The instrument provides all connected instrument with its synchroni sation including the trigger signal and reference clock signa...

Page 393: ...ly supplied clock Symbol A symbol clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector Multiple Sym bol A multiple of the symbol clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector the symbol clock is derived internally from this The Multiplier window provided allows the multiplication factor to be entered Remote command SOURce hw BB DM CLOCk MODE on page 652 Symbol Clock Multiplier Enters the multiplication factor fo...

Page 394: ...from the memory size however these options offer the same functional ity either one can be installed 5 9 4 1 Introduction This chapter provides background information on the ARB functionality and the impact of the provided settings For description on the multi carrier multi segment and multi carrier continuous wave functions refer to Chapter 5 9 4 4 Multi Carrier Waveforms on page 423 Chapter 5 9 ...

Page 395: ...accessible for the operating system Playing and Streaming Waveform Files Playback from the internal memory In the most common case the ARB generator plays back a waveform file with a selectable clock frequency The R S SMBV loads the entire file into the ARB mem ory from where the IQ samples are played repeatedly This is suitable for files of limited size e g up to 128 MB for instruments equipped w...

Page 396: ... and constant Clock Frequency of 10 KHz The values for each I and Q components are selectable but constant They are defined as a decimal number which is decimal to binary con verted internally The signal is provided as a 16 bit wide digital signal for both I and Q channels Converted to analog the signal is output directly at the BNC connectors I and Q outputs of the instrument Waveform Sample Rate...

Page 397: ...ated as follow finput BasebandBandwidth 0 31 In instrument equipped with the combination R S SMBV B10 K522 a modulation sig nal with a sample rate finput 200 MHz is passed directly to the digital to analog con verter DAC i e the resampling unit is bypassed After the DAC this signal features a RFBandwidthmax 160 MHz Impact of the Oversampling Factor Waveforms generated by the R S WinIQSIM2 software...

Page 398: ... bits Maximum Waveform Length with 2 markers 128 MB 4 2 bytes 30 MSamples Theoretical Maximum Waveform Length no markers 128 MB 4 bytes 32 MSamples Hence a memory size of 128 MB yields a maximum waveform length of 30 MSamples if two markers are enabled The maximum waveform length increases to 32 MSamples if the internal hardware markers are used and the complete memory is available for I Q data In...

Page 399: ...ernal Delay Unit Samples The value of ARB Trigger In External Delay is 10 Samples Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 This principle applies for any external triggering and triggering via the other path s 5 9 4 2 ARB User Interface To access the ARB dialog select Baseband ARB or use the MENU key under Baseband The ARB dialog is divided into an upper and a lower general part together with a Marker section The upp...

Page 400: ...ly displayed if a multi segment waveform is loaded The section comprises the settings necessary to adjust the trigger for the switch between the segments of a multi segment waveform The parameters displayed depend on the selected trigger source The parameters in this sections are identical with the parameters in the section Next Segment Trigger In in the Trigger Marker dialog for detailed informat...

Page 401: ...efault Calls default settings The values are shown in the Table 5 10 Table 5 10 Default Settings Parameter Value State Off Clock Freq 1 MHz Trigger Mode Auto Trigger Source Internal Marker State Off Marker Mode Unchanged Clock Source Internal Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary PRESet on page 601 Load Waveform Calls the File Select menu for loading the waveform file The files last used are liste...

Page 402: ...n multi segment waveform files the values of the settings can be queried by means of the Tag commands see Chapter 7 4 Waveform and List Format on page 511 Remote command n a Clock Frequency Displays or enters the ARB output clock rate When the waveform file is loaded this value is automatically set to the clock rate defined in the file Clock tag The user can subsequently alter the value if necessa...

Page 403: ...Clock Settings on page 402 Remote command n a Create Test Signal Selects the form of the test signal and calls the menu for generating it A sinusoidal rectangular or test signal with constant I Q can be selected See the corresponding section for detailed description of the parameters for the selected test signal Sine Test Signals on page 404 Rect Test Signal on page 405 Const IQ Test Signal on pag...

Page 404: ...e the segment triggering is configured This sec tion is enabled only for multi segment waferoms The Marker Mode section is where the marker signals at the MARKER output con nectors are configured The Marker Delay section is where a marker signal delay can be defined either with out restriction or restricted to the dynamic section i e the section in which it is possi ble to make settings without re...

Page 405: ...curs Then the signal is generated continuously Button Arm stops signal generation A subsequent trigger event internal with Execute Trigger or external causes a restart Armed_Ret rigger The signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs Then the signal is generated continuously Every subsequent trigger event cau ses a restart Button Arm stops signal generation A subsequent trigger event inter...

Page 406: ...rnal trigger event to restart ARB modulation is disabled State Off Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger RMODe on page 607 Arm Stops waveform output This button appears only with Running signal generation in the Armed_Auto and Armed_Retrigger trigger modes Signal output can be restarted by a new trigger internally with Execute Trigger or externally Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRI...

Page 407: ...plication Sync Output to External Trig ger Common External Trigger event for the master and the slave instruments All instruments are synchronous to the external trigger event ON All instruments are synchronous among themselves but starting the signal from first symbol is more important than synchronicity with external trigger event OFF Internal trigger signal of the mas ter R S SMBV for the slave...

Page 408: ...ays the delay converted in time Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger DELay UNIT on page 609 Trigger Delay Sets the trigger signal delay in samples on external triggering or on internal triggering via the second path This enables the R S SMBV to be synchronized with the device under test or other external devices The parameter Actual Trigger Delay displays the delay converted in time Remot...

Page 409: ... Next Segment Selects the waveform segment to be output next It determines the start segment when switching on the ARB and enables switchover to any other segment The switchover is performed either after receiving an external next segment trigger event or for the internal trigger case by changing the segment index in the Next Seg ment field The definition whether the new segment is generated immed...

Page 410: ... signal segment to a sawtooth segment I channel above in the case of next segment external triggering below When Next Segment Seamless is selected and a new segment trigger event occurs the new segment is not output until the whole of the current segment has been output wrap around In this case the signal transition is seamless As a pre requisite for a seamless switchover all segments must have th...

Page 411: ...e whole multi segment sequence is set with the parameters in the Trigger In section of the Trigger Marker Clock dialog The segment currently being output is displayed at Current Segment The Trigger Example graph displays schematically the waveform output depending on the activated trigger and the next segment settings Baseband Signal Baseband Block ...

Page 412: ... in Next Segment signal output is stopped and the new segment is not output until a trigger occurs In the case of Trigger Retrigger output starts at once and the segment is generated continuously a trigger event causes a restart If the segment is changed in Next Segment output of the cur rent segment is stopped and the new segment is output immedi ately following a system imposed signal gap see ab...

Page 413: ...nt is not output until a trigger occurs In the case of External Trigger Auto output starts at once and the segment is generated continuously Further trigger events are ignored Each next segment trigger event switches over to outputting the subsequent segment fol lowing a system imposed signal gap If the segment index is changed in Next Segment output of the current segment is stopped and the new s...

Page 414: ... is changed in Next Segment the new segment is output seamlessly after the output of the current segment is com plete In the case of External Trigger Armed_Auto output starts after the first trigger event The segment is then generated continu ously Each trigger event re starts the segment each next segment trigger event switches over to outputting the subsequent segment once the output of the curr...

Page 415: ...gment is input on the NEXT connector Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT SOURce on page 646 Execute Next Segment Triggers manually switchover to the subsequent segment in the mutli segment file A manual trigger can be executed only when an internal Next Segment Source has been selected To perform a switchover to any segment within the multi segment file adjust the parameter Next Se...

Page 416: ...MODE on page 611 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe DIVider on page 613 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency on page 613 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern on page 613 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime on page 612 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime on page 612 Marker Delay The delay of the signals on the MARKER outputs is se...

Page 417: ...the master instrument to the slave one and between each two consecutive slave instruments must have the same length and type Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points None The instrument is working in stand alone mode Sync Master The instrument provides all connected instrument with its synchroni sation including the trigger signal and reference clock signal Sync Slave The instrument rec...

Page 418: ... sample clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector the sample clock is derived internally from this The Multiplier window provided allows the multiplication factor to be entered Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk MODE on page 602 Sample Clock Multiplier Enters the multiplication factor for clock type Multiple Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk MULTiplier on page 602 Measured Exter...

Page 419: ... Enters the frequency of the test signal Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE FREQuency on page 617 Samples per Period Sine Test Signal Enters the number of sample values required from the sine wave per period The resulting clock rate must not exceed the maximum ARB clock rate see data sheet The number of sample values is automatically restricted by reference to the set frequency Rem...

Page 420: ...t signal A rectangular test signal with a duty factor of 0 5 is created Amplitude and offset are adjustable Both paths I and Q get the same signal Frequency Rect Test Signal Enters the frequency of the test signal Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle FREQuency on page 616 Samples per Period Rect Test Signal Enters the number of sample values required for the rectangular signal p...

Page 421: ...t the parameter Create Test Signal to Const I Q and press Create Test Signal The dialog can be used to configure a continuous test signal with constant IQ The I and Q values for each path are adjustable but constant The I and Q values are entered as a decimal number which is decimal to binary converted internally The sig nal is provided as a 16 bit wide digital signal for both I and Q channels Con...

Page 422: ... enable rapid alternation between different waveforms with differing test signals the R S SMBV provides the functionality to generate multi segment wave form files This section introduces the concept of the multi segment waveform files together with description of the provided settings and some typical configuration examples Required options Multi segment waveform files require the corresponding D...

Page 423: ...terface displays information on clock rate number of samples and creation day Additionally you can acquire informa tion about the waveform in the dedicated Waveform Info dialog The ARB Sequencer Mode If very high switch over speeds are required the test signals can be continuously scrol led through with the aid of an external trigger or by applying a predefined Play List The R S SMBV provides the ...

Page 424: ...uencing list file per multi segment waveform file The sequencing list file carries information only about the segment number the corresponding waveform file names are retrieved from the assigned multi segment waveform file i e the same sequencing list file can be reused for different multi segment waveform files with the same number of segments Changes and re calculations of a multi segment wavefo...

Page 425: ...signals are mapped to the same connector Figure 5 27 Marker priority used by assigning of marker signals to a hardware connector Impact of the Trigger Settings and Next Segment Settings The ARB dialog is equipped with the standard regular trigger settings These settings are provided for triggering of the composed multi segment waveform as a sequence i e as one file This section focuses on the addi...

Page 426: ... used to cyclically output the segments in the multi segment file Defining Next Segment Source As with the standard trigger system provided are the following two sources for the next segment signal Internal the switch over to the subsequent segment is triggered manually by means of the Execute Next Segment function To trigger a switch over to any segment within the multi segment waveform change th...

Page 427: ...erate a multi segment signal without signal gaps between the segments is to use the provided ARB sequencer mode see Multi Segment Wave form Settings on page 413 The Table 5 12 shows two examples of the transition from a sinewave signal segment to a sawtooth segment I channel upper curve in the case of next segment external triggering The left graphic displays an abrupt transition the right graphic...

Page 428: ... Table 5 13 Trigger examples in the ARB dialog Next Segment Mode Next Segment Next Segment Mode Next Segment Seamless Multi Segment Waveform Settings To access the Multi Segment dialog select Baseband ARB Multi Segment Example How to create multi segment waveform file 1 Select New List to create empty list 2 Use the Append function to add two or more waveform files 3 Adjust the Level Clock and Seg...

Page 429: ...e Next Segment or Next Segment Seamless Waveform Indication of the waveform file name of the segment Clock Rate Indication of the clock rate of the segment Samples Indication of the number of samples in the segment Period Indication of the segment duration Path Indication of the location of the waveform file used for the corre sponding segment Comment Indication of the comment on the segment Info ...

Page 430: ...k segment Remote command n a Append Blank Adds the blank segment to the multi segment file Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure BLANk APPend on page 639 Level Clock Marker The Level Marker Clock section provides the parameters necessary to adjust the level marker and clock settings for the selected multi segment waveform file Level Defines the level mode for the multi segment w...

Page 431: ...ween segments The time for calculating the multi segment waveform is increased since the individual segments have to be resampled Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk MODE on page 640 User Clock Rate Defines the sample rate used for multi segment waveform output in case of Clock Mode User Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk on page 640 Segment M...

Page 432: ... as well as in case of segment replay Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure MARKer ESEGment on page 642 Output File In the Output File section the output file name is specified and a comment can be added to the file Comment Adds a comment to the multi segment file Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure COMMent on page 641 Output file Opens the File menu where t...

Page 433: ...file to be edited Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CATalog on page 640 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SELect on page 644 New List Calls the Create Multi Segment Waveform List dialog to enter the name of the new file A new new configuration table is created Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure SELect on page 644 Define Sequencing List Open a di...

Page 434: ...file to be used for the creation of the multi segment waveform is defined with the command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CREate or SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CLOad The file name of the waveform file is always determined with the command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure OFILe Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CLOad on page 638 Multi Segment Waveform Sequencing The setti...

Page 435: ...sage is displayed to inform about necessary corrections in the play list Remote command n a Assigned to Multi Seg Waveform Displays the name of the multi segment waveform file the current sequencing list file is assigned to Remote command n a Sequencing Play List The Sequencing Play List table is used to define the sequence in which the waveform file segments are processed and how many times each ...

Page 436: ...f the sequencing play list Endless The current segment is re played until a signal restart like a retrigger signal is received and the complete sequencing play list is restarted Only active segments are considered Goto Id Determines the row number of the segment to be processed next This feature is currently limited for the first 32 rows Remote command n a Info Sequencing Play List Opens a dialog ...

Page 437: ...ion wvs Remote command n a Typical Applications for Multi Segment Waveforms This section gives examples of the typical applications for multi sgment waveforms High Speed Switchovers To test DUTs chips using different test signals at high throughput requires extremely fast switchovers for instance when testing ATE devices during manufacture The fol lowing settings enable switching times of approx 5...

Page 438: ...t or User when creating the waveform in the Multi Seg ment Editor 5 9 4 4 Multi Carrier Waveforms Multi carrier waveforms consisting of up to 512 carriers modulated by user selectable baseband signals can be created in order to simulate complex multi carrier scenarios with different baseband signals e g CDMA2000 or 3GPP FDD The carriers are equally spaced and centered toward the RF frequency or ba...

Page 439: ...s The General Settings section is used to configure the main multi carrier waveform The buttons in the middle part of the menu open submenus for defining the carrier table The carrier settings can be checked in the graphical Carrier Graph submenu The Output Settings section indicates the name the size and the clock rate of the multi carrier waveform after calculation The buttons in the lower part ...

Page 440: ...aved Multi Carrier con figuration The configuration of the selected highlighted file is loaded by press ing the Select button Save Multi Carrier Settings Opens the File Select window for saving the current Multi Carrier signal configuration The name of the file is specified in the File name entry field the directory selected in the Save Into field The file is saved by press ing the Save button The...

Page 441: ...ing to the former settings Otherwise the parameters are preset with the default values Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier COUNt on page 619 Carrier Spacing Sets the frequency spacing between adjacent carriers of the multi carrier waveform The carriers are arranged symmetrically around the RF carrier and the maximum car rier spacing is limited to Carrier Spacing Total Baseband B...

Page 442: ... Target Crest Factor The resulting clipped peak power is defined by sum of the the RMS level of the unclip ped multi carrier signal and the input parameter Target Crest Factor Note that clip ping reduces also the RMS level Hence the resulting crest factor of the clipped signal is slightly above the Target Crest Factor In order to get the unclipped parts of the clipped multicarrier signal matched w...

Page 443: ...resulting signal period is defined by the longest I Q file in the car rier table Shorter I Q files are periodically repeated Shortest File Wins The resulting signal period is defined by the shortest I Q file in the carrier table Only the first part of longer I Q files is used User The signal period can be set by the user in the Signal Period field Shorter I Q files are repeated periodically and on...

Page 444: ...ower and the configured Carrier Gain Example A multi carrier signal is composed from two waveform files First carrier Gain 0 dB Second carrier Gain 3 dB In the resulting multi carrier signal the RMS power of the second car rier signal will be 3 dB lower than the RMS power of the first carrier signal Baseband Signal Baseband Block ...

Page 445: ...rms with dif ferent crest factor A multi carrier signal is composed from two waveform files with the following characteristics 3GPP FDD signals with the same Sample Rate but different Crest Factors Peak 0 dBFS Carrier Gain 0 dB The Peak values of the carrier signals are equal the RMS values are different Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier POWer REFerence on page 622 Carrier Table Calls...

Page 446: ...calculated can be entered The multi carrier waveform is calculated and saved under this name by clicking the Create or Create and Load button Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier OFILe on page 630 Clock Rate Displays the resulting sample rate at which the multi carrier waveform is output by the arbitrary waveform generator The output clock rate depends on the number of carri ers carrier ...

Page 447: ...ame is specified the File Manager opens so that the file name can be entered As with normal waveforms the file extension is wv Depending on the configuration of the multi carrier waveform calculation may take some time A panel with a progress bar and an Abort button appears during the cal culation process Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CLOad on page 625 Muti Carrier Table The Multi...

Page 448: ...itrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier STOP on page 629 Gain Start Sets the gain of the carrier marked by Carrier Start Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier POWer STARt on page 629 Gain Step Sets the step width that is used to increment the gain The resulting carrier gain in the carrier table equals GainStart n Gain Step where n ranges from 0 to Carrier Stop Carrier Start Remote comma...

Page 449: ...th the I Q signal to be modulated onto all carriers of the selected carrier range Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier FILE on page 627 Apply Assistant Settings Transfer the assistant settings to the carrier table Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier EXECute on page 627 Carrier Table The table displays the settings of all available carriers Previously ...

Page 450: ...POWer on page 622 Phase Carrier Table Sets the starting phase of a carrier Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch PHASe on page 622 Delay Carrier Table Sets the starting delay of a carrier Remote command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch DELay on page 621 File Carrier Table Calls the File menu for selecting the input file with the I Q signal to be modulated onto the car...

Page 451: ...y setup by the following instructions 1 Load a standardized 3GPP downlink test model e g Test Model 1_16 and set State to ON 2 Create a 3GPP Testmodel ARB file by activating Generate Waveform File 3 Setup a multi carrier scenario with 4 carriers and a carrier spacing of 5 MHz 4 Apply the input file containing the previously generated 3GPP testmodel to all 4 carriers 5 9 5 Multi Carrier Continuous ...

Page 452: ...e Multi Carrier CW dialog is divided into the following sections The upper part of the menu is used for powering up the Multi Carrier CW and calling the default settings The Carrier Setup section is used to configure the Multi Carrier CW signal The Table Setup Assistant section can be used to set a selectable carrier range The buttons in the lower part of the menu open dialogs for defining carrier...

Page 453: ...dual carriers are not adopted until the Accept button is pressed This applies to the settings in the Table Setup Assistant section and the Carrier Table dialog Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW STATe on page 693 Set to Default Calls default settings The values are shown in the following table Parameter Value State Not affected by Set to Default Carrier Setup Number of Carriers 64 Carrier Spacing 10...

Page 454: ...e table contains the missing entries are usually added at the end of the table Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier COUNt on page 694 Carrier Spacing Sets the spacing between carriers for the Multi Carrier CW signal The carriers are arranged symmetrically around the HF carrier The total bandwidth is calculated as follow Total Bandwidth Number of Carriers 1 Carrier Spacing The result must not e...

Page 455: ...ls in which all carriers are switched on and the power of the car riers is identical In a configuration which differs from this the achiev able crest factor is worse Target Crest Optimization of the crest factor to a desired value for all carrier config urations The optimization time depends on the number of carriers and the desired crest factor Computation time increases only when the number of c...

Page 456: ...te command SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier POWer STEP on page 701 Phase Start Sets the phase of the starting carrier This setting is only available for Optimize Crest Factor Mode Off Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier PHASe STARt on page 701 Phase Step Sets the width of the step with which the phase will be changed from carrier to carrier The phase that is set with Phase n Phase Step mus...

Page 457: ...ize Crest Factor Off No This is the carrier index State Switch a carrier on off Power Sets the power of a carrier Phase Sets the starting phase of a carrier Accept Transfer the settings in the carrier table into the instrument Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST STATe on page 696 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier STATe on page 698 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST POWer on page 695 SOURce hw BB MCC...

Page 458: ... selecting the clock source see Clock Settings on page 449 Remote command n a Trigger Marker Clock Settings To access this dialog select Main Menu Trigger Marker The Trigger In section is where the trigger for the signal is set Various parameters will be provided for the settings depending on which trigger source internal or exter nal is selected The current status of signal generation Running or ...

Page 459: ...external source the clock type The buttons in the last section lead to submenu for general trigger clock and mapping settings Trigger In The Trigger In section is where the trigger for the signal is set Various parameters will be provided for the settings depending on which trigger source internal or exter nal is selected The current status of signal generation Running or Stopped is indicated for ...

Page 460: ...be output in the Single trigger mode The unit of the entry is defined under Signal Duration Unit It is then possible to out put deliberately just part of the signal an exact sequence of the signal or a defined number of repetitions of the signal Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger SLENgth on page 706 Running Stopped Displays the status of signal generation for all trigger modes This display a...

Page 461: ...Rce on page 706 Sync Output to External Trigger enabled for Trigger Source External Enables disables output of the signal synchronous to the external trigger event For R S SMBV instruments For or two or more R S SMBVs configured to work in a master slave mode for syn chronous signal generation configure this parameter depending on the provided sys tem trigger event and the properties of the output...

Page 462: ...utput begins after elapsing of the processing time and starts with sample 0 i e the complete signal is outputted This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequences with signal duration comparable with the processing time of the instrument Remote command SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut on page 704 Trigger Delay Delays the trigger event of the signal from The ext...

Page 463: ...TRIGger OUTPut ch MODE on page 710 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe DIVider on page 712 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency on page 712 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch PATTern on page 711 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch ONTime on page 711 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime on page 711 Marker Delay The delay of the signals on the MARKER outputs is set in th...

Page 464: ... master instrument to the slave one and between each two consecutive slave instruments must have the same length and type Avoid unnecessary cable length and branching points None The instrument is working in stand alone mode Sync Master The instrument provides all connected instrument with its synchroni sation including the trigger signal and reference clock signal Sync Slave The instrument receiv...

Page 465: ...ck Provided for permanent monitoring of the enabled and externally supplied clock signal Remote command CLOCk INPut FREQuency Global Settings This section provides access general trigger clock and mapping settings Global Trigger Clock Settings Accesses the Global Trigger Clock Input Settings dialog This dialog is to set the trigger threshold the input impedance and the polarity of the clock and tr...

Page 466: ...ource typically a second R S Instrument and the receiving R S Instru ment have to be synchronized Analog Wideband I Q In and Baseband Input are not possible simultaneously and therefore switch each other off In addition to the I Q impairments in the Impairments block it is also possible to set analog I Q impairments in the I Q Modulator menu of the R S SMBV 5 10 1 Important Signal Parameters The c...

Page 467: ...te measurement time and perform a measurement For accurate level measurements set the measurement period to a time value that is long enough to capture several periods of the input signal Determined automatically digital baseband input only The R S SMBV can receive the values from the connected transmitter If the external digital signal source is a second Rohde Schwarz instrument it sig nals the p...

Page 468: ...bandwidth is calculated as Sample Rate 0 62 i e with a sample rate of exactly 100 MHz the modulation bandwidth is 62 MHz 5 10 2 BB Input Block The settings for frequency and phase offset are available in the BB In Out function block or in the BB In Out menu which is opened using the MENU key The external baseband signal is activated by switching on in the Baseband Input set tings menu as well as b...

Page 469: ...ing of the I and Q signal components which mirrors the spectrum at the f 0 line and inverts the sign of the frequency The I Q swap may be needed if an external CDMA signal is to be added to an inter nally generated baseband signal see description Digital Standard CDMA2000 Remote command SOURce hw BBIN IQSWap STATe on page 718 Sample Rate For digital input signals the section Sample Rate is availab...

Page 470: ...causes an over flow in signal transmission URUN Underrun The external sample rate frequency is too low which causes an underrun in signal transmission Remote command SOURce hw BBIN SRATe FIFO STATus on page 721 Baseband Input Level The crest factor and the peak power of the external baseband signal are entered in the section Baseband Input Level These values are necessary for a correct internal si...

Page 471: ... also Fulfilling the prerequisites for a correct signal processing of the externally supplied baseband signal on page 452 Remote command SOURce hw BBIN ALEVel EXECute on page 717 Crest Factor Sets the crest factor of the external analog or digital baseband signal Indicates the crest factor acquired with Auto Level Set See also Fulfilling the prerequisites for a correct signal processing of the ext...

Page 472: ...r by setting new values Crest Factor Peak Level Level Remote command SOURce hw BBIN OLOad HOLD STATe on page 719 Reset Executes a reset of the Overload Hold state and LED Remote command SOURce hw BBIN OLOad HOLD STATe on page 719 Connected Device Indicates the ID of a connected R S Instrument or R S device If supported by the transmitter also the transmitter sample rate is shown Note The connected...

Page 473: ...e setting range of the frequency offset is then calculated as described in Frequency Offset on page 324 With R S SMBV K522 for example it is 80 MHz Remote command SOURce hw BBIN FOFFset on page 718 Phase Offset Enters the phase offset for the external baseband signal The offset affects the signal on the output of the Baseband In Out block Remote command n a External Baseband Signal Baseband Input ...

Page 474: ...For a description of the interface refer to Chapter 6 1 5 Serial Interface on page 465 GPIB IEC IEEE Bus Interface VISA address string GPIB primary address INSTR no secondary address Optional GPIB bus interfaces according to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 are located on the rear panel of the instrument For a description of the interface refer to Chapter 6 1 6 GPIB Interface IEC IEEE Bus Interface o...

Page 475: ...s and Protocols on page 459 for an overview Instrument access via VXI 11 or HiSLIP protocols is achieved from high level program ming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer VISA encapsulates the low level VXI or GPIB function calls and thus makes the transport interface trans parent for the user A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the following interfa...

Page 476: ...ds Common commands their function and syntax are precisely defined in stan dard IEEE 488 2 They are employed identically on all instruments if imple mented They refer to functions such as management of the standardized sta tus registers reset and self test Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency settings Many of these commands ha...

Page 477: ...ss LAN device name INSTR TCPIP host address port SOCKET Where TCPIP designates the network protocol used host address is the IP address or host name of the device LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a subinstru ment inst0 selects the VXI 11 protocol optional default hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional port det...

Page 478: ...d the reques ted command but is delivered to the TCP IP buffers For more information see also the application note 1MA208 Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP 6 1 3 2 VXI 11 Protocol The VXI 11 standard is based on the ONC RPC Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call protocol which in turn relies on TCP IP as the network transport layer The TCP IP network protocol and the associated netw...

Page 479: ...s to remote state when a remote command is sent UNLESS NREN was sent before GTR Go to Remote Enables automatic transition from local state to remote state by a subsequent remote command after NREN was sent GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active instrument function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input LLO Loca...

Page 480: ...R Where ASRL 0 9 determines the number of the COM port on the controller side that has to be used for the serial connection Access via a bluetooth device requires the entry of the bluetooth pin in addition see Chapter 5 2 3 18 Security on page 147 To enable an error free and correct data transmission the parameters of the generator and the controller must have the same setting The serial interface...

Page 481: ... act on instruments previously addressed as listeners Universal Commands Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex They affect all instruments connected to the bus and do not require addressing Command Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the com mand processing software to a defined initial state Does not change...

Page 482: ...dresses 0 through 30 are allowed The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings Changing the GPIB address of the instrument The GPIB address can be changed manually or using a remote control command 1 Manually press the SETUP key 2 Select Remote GPIB 3 Enter the GPIB address 4 Remotely use the remote control command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 6 1 7 LXI Browser Interface LAN ex...

Page 483: ...re quency and level display explicitly This is useful when you remotely control the instru ment from a different location For information on how to disable the frequency and level display refer to Security Annotation Frequency and Security Annotation Amplitude in the operating manual Refer to Chapter 6 2 3 Examples on page 470 for practical examples on setting up of a remote control link and start...

Page 484: ...ional return to manual operation disable the LOCAL key of the instrument with the LLO command see Chapter 6 1 3 4 LAN Interface Mes sages on page 464 The instrument switches to REM LLO state The automatic transition from local state to remote state by a subsequent remote command and the command GTL are disabled To return to manual mode is only possible via remote control 4 Unlock the LOCAL key wit...

Page 485: ...re available in the down load area of the product website http www rohde schwarz com en products test_and_measurement product_categories signal_generation Starting a remote control session over GPIB As a prerequisite the GPIB address of the instrument which is factory set to 28 must not have been changed 1 Connect instrument and controller using GPIB cable and switch them on 2 Execute following co...

Page 486: ...either the R S SMBV s hostname or IP address See also Chapter 6 1 3 LAN Interface on page 461 In this example it is assumed that A LAN remote control link between the controller and the R S SMBV is already set up The R S VISA program is installed on the remote PC see http www rohde schwarz com rsvisa RS VISA Release Notes Configuring the controller To remote control the R S SMBV we use the R S VIS...

Page 487: ...ith OK 5 In the menu bar select Find Resource to search for the instrument in the LAN 6 Select VXI 11 and Find Resources R S VISA scans the network for connected instruments and lists all detected instu ments in the Resource list Note The search may take some time particularly in large networks 7 Select the required instrument and confirm with Select Starting a Remote Control Session ...

Page 488: ... S VISA indicates the instru ments IP address in the Resource field of the main application window 8 As an alternative to the IP address you can assign an alias name to the R S SMBV a In the menu bar select RsVisaConfig b In the toolbar select to access the VISA Rexource String Composer Starting a Remote Control Session ...

Page 489: ...e If the connection cannot be set up R S VISA displays an error in the log view For information on how to proceed when network failures occur see Status Information Error Messages and Trouble Shooting Resolving Network Connec tion Failures in the operating manual For further information on the functions to read and write to an open session as well as the utility applications the software provides ...

Page 490: ...S VISA displays each VISA function call in the log view on the left If you check the Write Log checkbox the log view entry is written to the log file as well You can operate the log view in two modes the Live Mode shows only the most recent messages whereas the View Mode allows you to scroll the history 4 To set e g the frequency enter SOUR1 FREQ 4 GHz and select Write To check the performed setti...

Page 491: ...d SYST KLOC ON 6 To prevent unintentional return to manual operation use the command LLO See also Chapter 6 1 3 4 LAN Interface Messages on page 464 The instrument switches to Remote LLO state The LOCAL key is disabled 7 To enable the LOCAL key use the command GTR 8 To return to manual operation see Chapter 6 2 2 Returning to Manual Opera tion on page 469 Tip Switching from manual operation to rem...

Page 492: ... The access string is composed of the open command short form and the socket address The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the R S SMBV and the number of the port configured for remote control via tel net The R S SMBV uses the port number 5025 for remote connection via Telnet Example o 10 113 1 150 5025 The connection to the instrument is set up and you can send...

Page 493: ...MOTE is displayed in the status line Telnet program examples The following program example shows a simple TcpClient class that is intended to explain on how to get started with programming of sockets The example sets up a socket communication to R S SMBV and opens a simple user interface very similar to the telnet which allows input of commands To enable real automation further development of the ...

Page 494: ...t const private string currentHostName int currentPort int currentSocketDescr SockAddrStruct serverAddress HostInfoStruct currentHostInfo bool clientIsConnected int receiveBufferSize TcpClient cpp include string defines structs for socket handling include netinet in h using namespace std typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct typedef struct hostent HostInfoStruct class TcpClient public TcpClien...

Page 495: ... 1024 TcpClient TcpClient currentHostInfo NULL void TcpClient connectToServer string hostname int port currentHostInfo gethostbyname hostname c_str if currentHostInfo NULL currentHostName currentPort 0 currentHostInfo NULL clientIsConnected false printf error connecting host n currentHostName hostname currentPort port currentSocketDescr socket AF_INET SOCK_STREAM 0 if currentSocketDescr 0 currentH...

Page 496: ...hrow string connection must be established before any data can be sent n char transmitBuffer new char txString length 1 memcpy transmitBuffer txString c_str txString length transmitBuffer txString length n newline is needed if send currentSocketDescr transmitBuffer txString length 1 0 0 throw string can t transmit data n delete transmitBuffer void TcpClient receive string rxString if clientIsConne...

Page 497: ...n currentPort TelnetClient cpp include iostream include TcpClient h void printUsage cout usage EthernetRawCommand server ip scpi command endl int main int argc char argv int errorCode 0 no error bool useSingleCommand false string singleCommand string hostname int port 5025 string input TcpClient client switch argc case 3 useSingleCommand true singleCommand argv 2 case 2 hostname argv 1 break defau...

Page 498: ...Pos 0 string rcStr client receive rcStr cout rcStr endl if useSingleCommand terminate true catch const string errorString cout errorString endl client disconnect return errorCode 6 3 SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a header and in most cases one or more parameters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers m...

Page 499: ...ument identification string 6 3 2 Syntax for Device Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument For demonstration purposes only assume the existence of the following commands for this section DISPlay WINDow 1 4 MAXimize Boolean FORMat READings DATA type length HCOPy DEVice COLor Boolean HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB red green blue H...

Page 500: ...d Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 Example Definition HCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant N Command HCOP PAGE DIM QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2 Different numbering in remote control For remote control the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec tion used in manual operation SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is t...

Page 501: ...al e g blank The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description Allowed parameters are Numeric Values 486 Special Numeric Values 487 Boolean Parameters 488 Text Parameters 488 Character Strings 488 Block Data 488 6 3 3 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding t...

Page 502: ... step The step width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP and DOWN INF and NINF INFinity and negative INFinity NINF represent the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as instrument respon ses NAN Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a instrument response This value is not defined Po...

Page 503: ...scape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND 6 3 3 5 Character Strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks or Example HCOP ITEM LABel Test1 HCOP ITEM LABel Test1 6 3 3 6 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data For example a command using a block data parameter has the following structure FORMat READings DATA 45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII...

Page 504: ...the mnemonics of a command The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it both single and double quotation marks are possible The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data ...

Page 505: ... The two following commands with identical meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric_value numeric_value The fo...

Page 506: ...ording to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 The requested parameter is transmitted without a header Example HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND Maximum values minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 3 5E9 Numeric values are ou...

Page 507: ... the order is called synchronization between the controller and the instrument Setting commands within one command line even though they can be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received To make sure that commands are actually executed in a certain order each command must be sent in a separate command line Example Commands and quer...

Page 508: ...eed to be synchronized SOUR BB 3GPP STAT ON SOUR BB GSM FORM FSK2 6 4 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set The controller can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur Table 6 5 Synchronization us...

Page 509: ... the overlapped command with OPC 3 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished Event status register ESE 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 3 Poll the operation complete state periodically with a timer using the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlap...

Page 510: ...ard Event Status Summary Bit MAV Message Available in Output Queue QUES Questionable Status Summary Bit 2 Error Event Queue 1 0 not used Note This legend explains the abbreviations to the Status Byte Register The R S SMBV uses the following status registers Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable SRE see Chapter 6 5 3 Sta tus Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE on page 498 Status R...

Page 511: ...ed in the overview Error Event Queue The error event queue contains all errors and events that have occurred in the past When reading the queue the instrument starts with the first occurred error event All status registers have the same internal structure SRE ESE The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI By analogy the ...

Page 512: ...ated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It ...

Page 513: ...s an informative error mes sage This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with remote control 3 QUEStionable status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be speci fied in greater detail by que...

Page 514: ...use is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 4 Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed f...

Page 515: ...e or several devices in a measuring system To do this and react appropriately the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices The following standard methods are used Service request SRQ initiated by the instrument Serial poll of all devices in the bus system initiated by the controller to find out who sent an SRQ and why Query of a specific instrument status by commands Que...

Page 516: ...ntroller 6 5 7 3 Query of an instrument status Each part of any status register can be read using queries There are two types of commands The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level registers The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers STATus QUEStionable The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register This number ...

Page 517: ...ar command processing and input buffer Yes Yes Yes 1 The first command in a command line that immediately follows a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA TOR clears the output buffer 6 6 General Programming Recommendations Initial instrument status before changing settings Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In con trast the priority of remote control is the predictability of...

Page 518: ... malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Error queues The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller pro gram as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status regis ters Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the control...

Page 519: ...ndicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R S SMBV follow the SCPI syntax rules Asynchronous commands A command which does not a...

Page 520: ...505 IDN 506 IST 506 OPC 506 OPT 506 PRE 507 PSC 507 RCL 507 RST 507 SAV 508 SRE 508 STB 508 TRG 508 TST 509 WAI 509 CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE Value Even...

Page 521: ...ftware Options on page 124 IST Individual status query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Return values ISTflag 0 1 Usage Query only OPC Operation complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writ...

Page 522: ...s of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 0 1 0 The contents of the status registers are preserved 1 Resets the status registers RCL Numb...

Page 523: ...ettings in a file use the com mand MMEM STOR STAT Manual operation See Save Immediate x on page 162 SRE Contents Service request enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command deter mines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters Contents Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range ...

Page 524: ...each digital standard and for the fader These specific commands are described in the asso ciated subsystems Four presetting actions are available Activating the default state of all internal instrument functions RST on page 507 Functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed e g GPIB address or reference oscillator source settings Activating the pr...

Page 525: ...also the settings that are not currently active are reset to their default values Usage Setting only SYSTem FPReset Triggers an instrument reset to the original state of delivery Note Factory Preset resets the Remote Channel and network settings to the default values Executing Factory Preset via remote control terminates the connection to the instru ment if these settings had been configured to va...

Page 526: ...lexible tag based form Tags are self contained information units Their general format is Name Data or Name Length Data The colon separates the name part and the data part The colon can be followed by a space for the sake of legibility The Name identifies the tag It is always expressed in capital letters The Data is tag specific and in most cases it is in ASCII plain text The Length specifies the n...

Page 527: ...SamplesSeg1 SamplesSegN 1 521 MWV_SEGMENT_START SampleStartOffsetSeg0 SampleStartOffsetSeg1 SampleStartOffsetSegN 1 521 MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MODE Mode 521 MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK ClockSeg0 ClockSeg1 ClockSegN 1 522 MWV_SEGMENT_LEVEL_OFFS RMSOffs_dBSg0 PeakOffs_dBSg0 RMSOffs_dBSgN 1 PeakOffs_dBSgN 1 523 MWV_SEGMENT_FILES FileNameSeg0 wv FileNameSeg1 wv FileNameSegN 1 wv 523 MWV_SEGMENTx_COMMENT text 523 CON...

Page 528: ...sult result UINT32 start i return result Example TYPE SMU WV 106656 BB ARB WAV TAG TYPE Queries the content of the TYPE tag Response SMU WV 106656 This is a valid waveform CLOCK frequency mandatory for waveforms The tag specifies the clock frequency at which the waveform has to be output in Hz on multi segment waveforms this tag contains the maximal clock of all segments A query of ARB CLOCk after...

Page 529: ...content of the COPYRIGHT tag of the selected wave form file Response Rohde Schwarz copyright resides with Rohde Schwarz Usage Setting only DATA BITLENGTH BitLength mandatory for data lists The tag contains the length of the data held in the DATA LIST tag in bits in ASCII for mat Example DATA BITLENGTH 444 BB DM DLIS TAG DATA BITLENGTH queries the content of the DATA BITLENGTH tag of the selected d...

Page 530: ...ing only EMPTYTAG Length EmptySequence mandatory in automatically generated one and multi segment waveforms This tag is empty i e contains no data and is used as placeholder Setting parameters Length An ASCII integer value that specifies the number of bytes in the EMPTYTAG i e defines the number of bytes from the colon to the end brace Note If you change the content of a waveform file change also ...

Page 531: ...x4000 The EMPTYTAG con tains 15946 blanks and has a length of 15946 1 bytes Usage Setting only CONTROL LENGTH ControlLength optional recommended for marker and control lists The tag specifies the length of all control or marker list in ASCII format The control length influences the way the marker and control lists are processed in particular the way traces are repeated see Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Ex...

Page 532: ...ndicates that the RMS level of the signal is 3 dBs below the full scale full scale max amplitude of vector of I Q samples SIQ max sqrt I2 Q2 max 0 dB PeakOffset_dB Defines the peak level offset of the signal relative to full scale for the ARB signal in the WAVEFORM tag The offset is defined in ASCII float format The value usually equals 0 dB as usually the I Q samples signed 16 bit integer values ...

Page 533: ...the data for the marker and control signals in the control list or the marker signals of ARB waveforms Traces are processed different depending on the selected CONTROL LENGTH See also Chapter 7 4 2 How to Define Periodically Repeating Traces on page 524 Setting parameters TRACE MARKER BURST LEVATT CW MODE HOP MAP Name of the marker or control signal For ARB waveforms it is only meaningful to defin...

Page 534: ... 10 1 20 0 30 1 BB DM CLIS TAG LEVATT LIST 1 Queries the content of the LEVATT LIST 1 tag of the selected control list file Response 0 0 10 1 20 0 30 1 Level attenuation applies to data values 10 to 19 high and from data value 30 onward Usage Setting only WAVEFORM Length I0Q0I1Q1 IxQx IN 1QN 1 mandatory for waveforms The tag contains the actual waveform data or multi segment waveform data I Q stre...

Page 535: ... one collectively waveform I Q stream The number of segments and the start offset and length of the individual segments inside the total waveform I Q stream is determined by the additional tags MWV_SEGMENT_COUNT MWV_SEGMENT_START and MWV_SEGMENT_LENGTH Further MWV_SEGMENT_ tags are also available for example for level and clock information Example One segment waveform WAVEFORM 401 I0 Q0 I1 Q1 I2 Q...

Page 536: ...ontains a list of I Q sample start offsets for every segment in the multi seg ment waveform in ASCII integer format Example MWV_SEGMENT_START 0 100 2 segments with 100 samples in segment 0 and 200 samples in segment 1 The start offset of first segment is 0 samples start offset of next segment 1 is the sample length of segment 0 100 samples Usage Setting only MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MODE Mode mandatory f...

Page 537: ...egment output waveform USER All segments have an indentical clock rate which is given by the user Note Only upsampling is allowed no downsampling If an individual original waveform has a lower clock rate an upsampling to the user clock rate will performed on calculation of the multi segment output waveform Example MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MODE UNCHANGED MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MODE HIGHEST MWV_SEGMENT_CLOCK_MO...

Page 538: ...onal for multi segment waveforms The tag contains a list of file names for every segment in the multi segment waveform in ASCII format Example MWV_SEGMENT_FILES var user sine wv var user rect wv Usage Setting only MWV_SEGMENTx_COMMENT text optional for multi segment waveforms The tag contains a user comment for a specific segment x 0 NumOfSeg 1 in the multi segment waveform in ASCII format Example...

Page 539: ...d as follow Length Size of 1 byte Number of marker elements mx 4 bit 8 bits byte The value is rounded up for byte alignment mx Marker element in 4 bit binary format Example CONTROL LIST WIDTH4 51 m0m1 mx m99 100 marker elements each marker element with 4 bits Usage Setting only 7 4 2 How to Define Periodically Repeating Traces If a marker trace is required that marks for example each frame start i...

Page 540: ... 0 99 0 3 Do not use the CONTROL LENGTH tag The length of the repeated patterns is determined by the last sample number in the TRACE LIST that is the last Pos State Example How the CONTROL LENGTH tag influences the processing of the traces For the example on Figure 7 4 use the same marker traces and set the CONTROL LENGTH tag e g CONTROL LENGTH 150 Figure 7 5 Example Processing of control signals ...

Page 541: ...he decimal values in SICO txt are normalized such that they are between 1 0 and 1 0 The data is converted into binary format The appropriate man datory tags are added and the data is packed into the WAVEFORM tag As result the waveform file SICO wv is generated This example follows the general principle of creating of a waveform manually using the tag file format The Figure 7 6 illustrates this gen...

Page 542: ...format consisting of 16 bit signed integer numbers The numeric range between 1 0 and 1 0 corresponds to the modulation range of the waveform 16 bit D A converter of 32767 to 32767 1 0 32767 0x7FFF 0 0 0 0x0000 1 0 32767 0x8001 The Figure 7 8 shows the calculation and conversion steps The highlighted col umns contain the resulting I and Q values represented in Little endian format Waveform and List...

Page 543: ...e instrument does not eval uate a checksum Tip The tags TYPE CLOCK LEVEL OFFS and WAVEFORM are mandatory for each waveform All other tags are optional and can be inserted after the TYPE tag in arbitrary order 4 Pack the binary data into a WAVEFORM tag with the described structure WAVEFORM Length I0Q0I1Q1I2Q2 InQn Calculate the Length Length Number of I Q pairs 4 1 20 4 1 81 bytes Place the string ...

Page 544: ...txt containing 20 sine and cosine pairs converting them into binary data and creating the waveform file SICO wv SICO cpp Defines the entry point for the console application include stdafx h include stdlib h include stdio h include math h int _tmain int argc _TCHAR argv const unsigned int samples 20 const float pi 3 141592654f int i SICO txt Creating the file SICO txt containing 20 sine and cosine ...

Page 545: ...S Peak fprintf fp_dest LEVEL OFFS f f 1 0f 20 0f log10 1 0f sqrt 2 0f 0 0f fprintf fp_dest WAVEFORM d samples 4 1 for i 0 i samples i Read I Q pair from ASCII file if fscanf fp_sour f f i_float q_float EOF break Convert I Q pair to unsigned short i_usint unsigned short floor i_float 32767 0 0 5 q_usint unsigned short floor q_float 32767 0 0 5 Write converted I Q pair to waveform file fwrite i_usin...

Page 546: ...ARKER LIST 2 0 0 350 1 457 0 MARKER LIST 1 0 0 108 1 160 0 CONTROL LENGTH 1000 The tags to the traces in the C List editor are HOP LIST CW MODE LIST LEVATT LIST 1 BURST LIST MARKER LIST 4 MARKER LIST 3 MARKER LIST 2 MARKER LIST 1 CONTROL LENGTH CONTROL LENGTH defines the periodicity of the total C List The remaining tags define the individual markers or control traces in a combined state starting ...

Page 547: ...editing binary data waveforms data and control lists Use hex data editor Always use a hex data editor to edit files containing binary data Editing of binary data file with a text editor even if you only change the ASCII part of the file corrupts the file Adapt the length information in the EMPTYTAG If you change the content of a waveform file change also the EMPTYTAG Length value For example if yo...

Page 548: ...R SETup TIMeout 542 BERT SETup TIMeout 542 BLER STARt 542 BERT STARt 542 BLER STATe 542 BERT STATe 542 BLER STOP 543 BERT STOP 543 BLER UNIT 543 BERT UNIT 543 SOURce INPut BERT IMPedance 543 SOURce INPut BERT THReshold 544 TRIGger BLER IMMediate 544 TRIGger BERT IMMediate 544 BERT BLER LOAD Filename Loads the selected BERT BLER settings file from the default or the specified directory Loaded are f...

Page 549: ... a new one is delayed until the first measurement result has been queried with BLER RES The resulting brief measure ment interruption is irrelevant because the subsequent measurement will be synchron ized within 24 data bits Return values NumBlock integer data blocks Numer of checked data blocks NumErrors integer Number of errors ErrorRate float If no termination criterion has been reached since t...

Page 550: ...nd synchronization has been performed Out of 1000 data blocks 5 error bits were measured yielding an error rate of 0 005 Usage Query only Manual operation See Bit Error Rate on page 189 BERT RESult Queries the result of the last BER measurement The response consists of seven results separated by commas In the first measurement following the start intermediate results for the number of data bits er...

Page 551: ...cted integer Status of data line 1 Data line active only clocked data is detected if the clock signal is missing a data change is also not detected 0 Data line is not active Synchronized integer 1 The measurement is synchronized i e the clock and data lines are active and the Number of error bits to Number of data bits ratio is better than 0 1 so that the measurement ratio can be assumed to be rea...

Page 552: ... number of data bits blocks or number of errors is reached RST AUTO Example BERT SEQ SING selects single measurement Example TRIG BERT starts the single measurement Options Dependencies These commands are automatically set to AUTO by BERT STARt or BLER STARt Manual operation See Mode on page 192 BLER SETup CLOCk POLarity Polarity BERT SETup CLOCk POLarity Polarity Sets the polarity of the active s...

Page 553: ... polarity of the feedback data bits Parameters Polarity NORMal INVerted NORMal High level stands for a logic 1 low level for a logic 0 INVerted Low level stands for a logic 1 high level for a logic 0 RST NORMal Example BERT SET DATA INV sets inversion of data signal Manual operation See Data Polarity on page 193 BLER SETup DATA CONNector Connector BERT SETup DATA CONNector Connector Selects the co...

Page 554: ...ata Enable signal The measurement is interrupted during a low level of the Data Enable signal LOW The Data Enable signal is used The only data measured is the data at the BERT data input during a low level of the Data Enable signal The measurement is interrupted during a high level of the Data Enable signal RST OFF Example BERT SET DEN HIGH The measurement is interrupted during the low level of th...

Page 555: ...ination criterion always terminates the measurement after the specified number of data bits data blocks Starting from this point the fourth value is output with 1 terminate measurement if the result is quer ied with BERT BLER RES If the continuous measurement mode BERT BLER SEQ AUTO has been selected the measurement is restarted once the results have been queried Parameters MCount integer Range 0 ...

Page 556: ... operation See External Restart on page 193 BERT SETup TYPE Type Selects the PRBS sequence The data generated by the PRBS generator is used as a reference for the measurement Parameters Type PRBS9 PRBS11 PRBS15 PRBS16 PRBS20 PRBS21 PRBS23 RST PRBS9 Example BERT SET TYPE PN15 sets a pseudo random binary sequence consisting of 32767 bits Manual operation See PRBS on page 193 BLER SETup TYPE Type Que...

Page 557: ...nt Usage Event Manual operation See Mode on page 192 BLER STATe State BERT STATe State Switches the measurement on off Depending on the selected mode either a continu ous measurement BERT BLER SEQ AUTO or a single measurement BERT BLER SEQ SING is carried out A single measurement must be triggered TRIG BERT BLER These commands are automatically set to ON by BERT STARt or BLER STARt and to OFF by B...

Page 558: ...f Number of errors and Number of data items unaffected by this command Parameters Unit ENGineering SCIentific PCT PPM ENGineering The error rate is output in exponential notation with the exponent 3 or 6 SCIentific The error rate is output in scientific notation i e standardized to one place to the left of the decimal PCT The error rate is output in percent PPM The error rate is output in parts pe...

Page 559: ...reshold of 1 volt is set at the BERT inputs The sig nal is high active for a signal voltage of 1 volt and higher Manual operation See Threshold on page 195 TRIGger BLER IMMediate TRIGger BERT IMMediate Triggers a single bit error rate or block error rate measurement if the single trigger mode BERT BLER SEQ SING is selected Example BERT SEQ SING selects the single trigger mode Example TRIG BERT sta...

Page 560: ...Libration hw LEVel STATe 548 CALibration ROSCillator DATA 548 CALibration ALL MEASure Force Starts all internal adjustments that do not require external measurement equipment Query parameters Force string Return values Measure 0 1 OFF ON Example CAL ALL MEAS Response 0 Adjustment has been performed successfully Usage Query only Manual operation See Adjust All on page 121 CALibration hw BBIN MEASur...

Page 561: ...erformed successfully Usage Query only Manual operation See Adjust FM Offset on page 256 CALibration hw FREQuency MEASure Starts all adjustments which affect the frequency Return values Measure 0 1 Example CAL FREQ MEAS starts the adjustments for maximum frequency accuracy Response 0 the adjustments have been performed successfully Usage Query only Manual operation See Adjust Synthesis on page 121...

Page 562: ...es Local 0 1 RST 0 Example CAL IQM LOC starts adjustment for the I Q modulator for the currently set fre quency Response 0 adjustment has been performed successfully Usage Query only Manual operation See Adjust I Q Modulator Current Frequency on page 121 CALibration hw LEVel ALCTable MEASure Performs ALC adjustments according to the predefined values in the ALC table Return values Measure 0 1 OFF ...

Page 563: ... for external level correction The customer data is obtained using a R S NRP power sensor External level correction is a protected function see service manual chapter 2 Adjustment Parameters Data FACTory CUSTomer RST FACTory Example CAL LEV EXT DATA FACT selects the use of the data aquired at the factory for external level correction Manual operation See Adjustment Data on page 225 CALibration hw ...

Page 564: ... Manual operation See Measured External Clock on page 378 CLOCk INPut SLOPe Slope Sets the active slope of an externally applied clock signal at the CLOCK connector Parameters Slope NEGative POSitive RST POSitive Example CLOC INP SLOP NEG The active slope of the external clock signal is the falling slope Manual operation See Clock Input Slope on page 141 7 8 DIAGnostic Subsystem The DIAGnostic sys...

Page 565: ... Module revision Module serial number Each entry for one module consists of four parts which are sepa rated by space characters Example DIAG BGIN Queries the instrument configuration Response MBRD SSYN IQOP3 IQOP3_LCM Returns the data of all available modules DIAG BGIN MBRD Queries the configuration of the motherboard Response MBRD 1141 3501 02 1 5 3 100023 Module motherboard with part number 1141...

Page 566: ...AG INFO POC queries the number of power on events Response 123 The instrument was switched on for 123 times up to now Usage Query only Manual operation See Power On Count on page 122 7 9 DISPlay Subsystem The DISPlay subsystem contains the commands to set the power save mode of the instrument DISPlay ANNotation AMPLitude 551 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 552 DISPlay ANNotation ALL 552 DISPlay DIALo...

Page 567: ...ion Frequency on page 151 DISPlay ANNotation ALL State Displays asterisks instead of the level and frequency values in the status bar of the instrument This setting is useful when you remotely control the instrument Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 1 Example DISP ANN AMPL ON Shows asterisks instead of frequency and level values DISPlay DIALog CLOSe DialogId Closes the specified dialog To determine ...

Page 568: ...ple DISP DIAL OPEN dialog ID Opens the dialog determined with the dialog ID Usage Setting only DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff HoldoffTimeMin Sets the waiting time for the screen save mode of the display Parameters HoldoffTimeMin integer Range 1 to 60 RST n a factory preset 10 Default unit minute Example DISP PSAV HOLD 8 Sets the timeout of the screen saver to 8 minutes Manual operation See Wait Time on pag...

Page 569: ... OFF ON RST n a factory preset 1 Example DISP UPD ON Activates automatic update of the display at defined time inter vals 7 10 FORMat Subsystem The FORMat subsystem contains the commands which determine the format of the data that the R S SMBV returns to the controller This affects all query commands which return a list of numerical data or block data Reference is made to this in the descriptions ...

Page 570: ...it first FORMat DATA Data Determines the data format which the R S SMBV uses to return data When data is transferred from the control computer to the instrument the instrument detects the data format automatically In this case the value set here is irrelevant Parameters Data ASCii PACKed ASCii Numerical data is transferred as plain text separated by com mas PACKed Numerical data is transferred as ...

Page 571: ...stem The HCOPy subsystem contains the commands to generate a hardcopy of the display Example Store a hard copy of the display The following example lists commands to configure and execute a hard copy to an automatic named file Hard copy settings HCOPy DEVice LANGuage PNG HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO STATe 1 defines the output format sets the instrument to automatically create output file names Configure h...

Page 572: ...the path and file name of the automatically generated file response usb HCopy hardcopy1607001 bmp HCOPy DATA 557 HCOPy IMAGe FORMat 558 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 558 HCOPy EXECute 558 HCOPy FILE NAME 558 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO 558 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory CLEar 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE DAY STATe 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE MON...

Page 573: ...xample See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 556 Usage Event Manual operation See Save on page 158 HCOPy FILE NAME Name Determines the file name and path to save the hard copy provided automatic naming is disabled Note If you have enabled automatic naming the instrument automatically generates the file name and directory Parameters Name string Example See Example Store a hard copy o...

Page 574: ...naming Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 556 Usage Event Manual operation See File Options on page 157 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE Queries the name of the autmatically named hard copy file An automatically generated name consists of Prefix YYYY MM DD Number Format You can activate each component separately to individually design the file name Return values File string Exam...

Page 575: ... three digits Return values Number integer Range 0 to 999999 RST 0 Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 556 Usage Query only Manual operation See File Options on page 157 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE PREFix Prefix Defines the prefix part in the automatic file name The usage of the prefix is activated with command HCOP FILE AUTO PREF STAT 1 Parameters Prefix string Example See ...

Page 576: ... dialog Parameters Region ALL DIALog RST ALL Example See Example Store a hard copy of the display on page 556 Manual operation See File Options on page 157 7 12 KBOard Subsystem The KBOard system contains the commands to set the external keyboard KBOard LANGuage 561 KBOard LAYout 562 KBOard LANGuage Language This command selects the keyboard language The assignment of some keys depends on the sele...

Page 577: ...e created on var user Some default subdirectories are predefined but can be changed at any time The default directory is determined using the command MMEMory CDIR Use the command SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER to query the path of the direc tory for user defined data The opt directory is a protected and therefore a not accessible system directory The files on this directory contain data that must not be...

Page 578: ...n is provided either the values specified in the parameter or the values specified with the command MMEM CDIR default directory are used for the path and the drive settings in the commands Before the instrument settings can be stored in a file they have to be stored in an inter mediate memory using common command SAV number The specified number is subsequently used in the MMEMory STORe STATe on pa...

Page 579: ... Slot Higher symbol rate slot gsm_hslu Frame Higher symbol rate frame gsm_hfu Bluetooth Bluetooth Set tings Complete setting of the Bluetooth menu bto TETRA TETRA Set tings Complete setting of the TETRA menu tetra 3GPP FDD Settings Complete setting of the 3GPP FDD menu 3g Settings Channel coding enhanced DPCH channels downlink 3g_ccod_dl_s Settings Channel coding enhanced DPDCH channels uplink 3g_...

Page 580: ...c rs_acq FM Stereo Settings Complete setting of the FM Stereo menu fmstereo Settings FM Stereo Group Type Settings fm_gt Settings FM Stereo Group Hex Type Settings fm_ghex Waveform File Waveform File wav Sirius Settings Complete setting of the Sirirus menu sirius XM Radio Settings Complete setting of the XM Radio menu xmradio Settings XM Radio TWTA Data twta DVB Settings Complete setting of the DV...

Page 581: ...and Directories 1 Read out all files in the specified directory MMEM CAT var usb user Response 127145265 175325184 test DIR 0 temp DIR 0 readme txt ASC 1324 state savrcltxt STAT 5327 waveform wv BIN 2342 the directory var usb user contains the subdirectories test and temp as well as the files readme txt state savrcltxt and waveform wv which have dif ferent file types Tip To query only the subdirec...

Page 582: ...ory 574 MMEMory STORe STATe 575 MMEMory CATalog path Returns the content of a particular directory Query parameters path string String parameter to specify the directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory CDIRectory The path may be relative or absolute Return values UsedDiskSpace Byte size of all files in the directory FreeDiskSpace Re...

Page 583: ...Mory CDIRectory Directory Changes the default directory for mass memory storage The directory is used for all subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them Parameters Directory directory_name String containing the path to another directory The path can be relative or absolute To change to a higher directory use two dots Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 566 Usage ...

Page 584: ...e correct data transfer The query command transfers the specified file from the instrument to the GPIB bus and then on to the controller It is important to ensure that the intermediate memory on the controller is large enough to take the file The setting for the GPIB bus terminator is irrelevant Tip Use this command to read transfer stored instrument settings or waveforms directly from to the inst...

Page 585: ... the file content follows the waveform file format The query reads out the I Q data part or the marker information of the specified file Waveform files can also be created with the command SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform DATA In this case the complete content of the waveform file must be specified i e not only the I Q or marker data but all required tags Parameters Msus Identifier file name Mass S...

Page 586: ...e Binary data part I0Q0 IxQx IN 1QN 1 Binary data in ASCII format IxQx represents binary data 16 bit signed integer in 2 s com plement notation containing the I and Q component alternately and starting with the I component Each T and Q component consists of 2 bytes in MSB format most significant byte first The values of the 2 bytes in an I component and a Q component are in the range 32768 to 3276...

Page 587: ...1E6 SOURce1 BB ARBitrary WAVeform CLOCk var user wave wv MMEMory DCATalog path Returns the subdirectories of a particular directory Query parameters path String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omit ted the command queries the content of the current directory queried with MMEMory CDIRectory command Return values Catalog file_entry Names of the subdirectories separated by colo...

Page 588: ...MemKb integer Total physical memory ApplicMemKb integer Application memory HeapUsedKb integer Used heap memory HeapAvailableKb integer Available heap memory Usage Query only MMEMory LOAD STATe SavRclStateNumb file_name Loads the specified file stored under the specified name in an internal memory After the file has been loaded the instrument setting must be activated using an RCL command Setting p...

Page 589: ...ecified renames an existing file Setting parameters SourceFile string String parameter to specify the name of the file to be moved DestinationFile string String parameters to specify the name of the new file Example See Working with Files and Directories on page 566 Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Rename on page 168 MMEMory MSIS Msis Defines the drive or network resource in the cas...

Page 590: ... file_name String parameter to specify the file name with extension savrcltxt Example See Storing and Loading Current Settings on page 566 Usage Event Manual operation See Save on page 162 7 14 OUTPut Subsystem The OUTPut system contains the commands which set the properties of the RF OUTPUT connectors and USER connectors The properties of the LF output connector are set in the SOURce LFOutput Sub...

Page 591: ...ximum level for the FIXed setting for the RF out put Example Response 27 The maximum level is 27 dBm Usage Query only Manual operation See Fixed Range PEP In on page 224 OUTPut hw AMODe AMode Selects the mode of the attenuator at the RF output Attenuator MODe Parameters AMode AUTO FIXed AUTO The electronically switching attenuator switches with a 5 dB step width at fixed switching points FIXed The...

Page 592: ...Query only OUTPut hw PROTection CLEar Resets the protective circuit after it has been tripped The state of the output is again determined by OUTPut STATe Example OUTP PROT CLE resets the protective circuit for RF output Usage Event Manual operation See Overload on page 240 OUTPut hw PROTection TRIPped Queries the state of the protective circuit Return values Tripped 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example OUTP P...

Page 593: ...CHanged Example OUTP PON OFF RF output A is deactivated when the instrument is switched on Manual operation See Power On State RF Signal on page 225 7 15 SENSe READ and INITiate Subsystems The SENSe subsystem contains the commands for configuring the power measure ments with R S NRP Zxx power sensor s connected to the generator The measure ment is started and the measurement result retrieved with ...

Page 594: ...583 SENSe ch POWer FILTer SONCe 584 SENSe ch POWer FILTer TYPE 584 SENSe ch POWer LOGGing STATe 585 SENSe ch POWer FREQuency 585 SENSe ch POWer OFFSet 586 SENSe ch POWer OFFSet STATe 586 SENSe ch POWer SNUMber 586 SENSe ch POWer SOURce 587 SENSe ch POWer STATus DEVice 587 SENSe ch POWer SVERsion 587 SENSe ch POWer TYPE 588 SENSe ch POWer ZERO 588 SENSe ch UNIT POWer 588 SENSe ch POWer APERture DEF...

Page 595: ...t influenced by this command measurements results can be retrieved with local state on or off Parameters Continuous 0 1 OFF ON RST OFF Example INIT CONT ON switches local state of continuous power measurement on Manual operation See State on page 243 READ ch POWer The command triggers the measurement with power sensors and provides the power measurement result of the selected power sensor The valu...

Page 596: ...al S parameter tables can be stored in a sensor The command selects a loaded data set for S parameter correction for the corresponding sensor Parameters Select float RST 0 SENSe ch POWer CORRection SPDevice STATe State The command activates the use of the s parameters correction data of the selected power sensor Note For power sensor with attenuator this command is automatically set to ON Paramete...

Page 597: ...ommand selects which power measurement result average or peak power is indicated when permanent display is active Parameters Priority AVERage PEAK RST PEAK Example SENS1 DISP PERM STAT ON the permanent viewer is switched on SENS1 DISP PERM PRI AVER the measured average power is indicated Manual operation See Display Priority on page 245 SENSe ch POWer FILTer LENGth AUTO The command queries the cur...

Page 598: ...0 ms 2x16x20 ms Manual operation See Filter Length on page 247 SENSe ch POWer FILTer NSRatio NSRatio The command defines the noise content for fixed noise filter mode SENSe 1 3 POWer FILTer TYPE NSRatio This value determines the proportion of intrinsic noise in the measured result Parameters NSRatio float Range 0 001 to 1 Increment 0 001 RST 0 01 Example SENS1 FILT TYPE NSR selects fixed noise fil...

Page 599: ... optimum filter length for the current mea surement conditions The found filter length can be retrieved with com mand SENSe POWer FILTer LENGth USER This command is only available for user filter mode SENSe POWer FILTer TYPE USER Example SENS FILT TYPE USER selects user filter mode SENS FILT SONC activates the search for the optimum filter length SENS FILT LENG returns the found optimum filter len...

Page 600: ...tent is entered with command SENSe FILTer NSRatio To avoid very long settling times when the power is low the averaging factor can be limited with the Timeout parameter command SENSe FILTer NSRatio MTIMe RST AUTO Example SENS FILT TYPE AUTO selects automatic filter selection Manual operation See Filter on page 246 SENSe ch POWer LOGGing STATe State Activates the recording of the power values measu...

Page 601: ...xample SENS POW OFFS 10 0 sets a level offset of 10 dB Manual operation See Level Offset on page 246 SENSe ch POWer OFFSet STATe State The command activates the addition of the level offset to the measured value The level offset value is set with command SENSe POWer OFFSet Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST OFF Example SENS1 POW OFFS 0 4dB sets a level offset of 0 4 dB SENS1 POW OFFS STAT ON a level ...

Page 602: ...sor is selected by suffix in the keyword SENSe or READ of the command header Suffix 1 denotes the sensor connected to the SENSOR connector suffix 2 the sensor connected first to one of the USB interfaces and suffix 3 the sensor connected second to one of the USB interfaces Return values DEVice 0 1 OFF ON Example SENS STAT queries if a sensor is connected to the instrument Response 1 a sensor is co...

Page 603: ...laced or if measurements of signals with very low power are to be per formed The RF power source must be switched off or disconnected from the sensor before starting the autozero function Example SENS ZERO activates autozero function Usage Event Manual operation See Zero Power Sensors on page 231 SENSe ch UNIT POWer Power The command selects the unit used for result query with command READ The pow...

Page 604: ...57 SOURce LIST Subsystem 767 SOURce MODulation Subsystem 780 SOURce PGEN Subsystem 780 SOURce PHASe Subsystem 781 SOURce PM Subsystem 782 SOURce POWer Subsystem 785 SOURce PULM Subsystem 796 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem 803 SOURce SWEep Subsystem 806 7 16 1 SOURce AM Subsystem The AM subsystem contains the commands for setting the amplitude modulation An external modulation signal is input at the ...

Page 605: ...de AC for external amplitude modulation Manual operation See AM External Coupling on page 252 SOURce hw AM SENSitivity Queries the input sensitivity of the externally applied signal for amplitude modulation The sensitivity depends on the set modulation SOURce hw AM DEPTh The returned value reports the sensitivity in V It is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input Return valu...

Page 606: ...T Example AM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source Manual operation See AM Source on page 251 SOURce hw AM STATe State Activates amplitude modulation Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example AM STAT ON activates AM modulation Manual operation See State on page 251 7 16 2 SOURce AWGN Subsystem The SOURce AWGN subsystem contains the commands for setting the noise generator These commands ...

Page 607: ...s as well as b s kb s and mab s Parameters BRate float Range 400 bps to 250E6 bps Increment 0 001 RST 100000 Example SOURce1 AWGN BRATe queries the bit rate which is used for calculation of the Eb N0 value from the C N value Manual operation See Bit Rate AWGN on page 312 SOURce hw AWGN BWIDth BWidth Sets the system bandwidth The noise signal at the level which corresponds to the specified carrier ...

Page 608: ... sets the ratio of minimum real noise bandwidth to system bandwidth The overall bandwidth is calculated as follows and may not exceed the total bandwidth specified in the data sheet Overall Bandwidth System BW x Min Noise System BW Ratio Parameters Ratio float Range 1 to Max Increment 0 1 RST 1 Example AWGN BWID RAT 2 sets a minimum noise system bandwidth ratio of 2 Manual operation See Minimum No...

Page 609: ... POW RMOD CARRier is adjusted to the set Eb N0 ratio AWGN POW RMOD CARRier the noise power is adjusted to the set Eb N0 ratio and the carrier power is kept con stant AWGN POW RMOD NOISe the carrier power is adjusted to the set Eb N0 ratio and the noise power is kept con stant For Digital Standard signals the bit rate used for calculation of Eb N0 value from C N value is defined with command SOUR A...

Page 610: ...s the desired frequency of the sine in AWGN MODE CW mode The resulting frequency may differ from the desired frequency because of the limited frequency resolution of 0 7 Hz Parameters Target float Range 40E6 to 40E6 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example AWGN FREQ TARG 2kHz sets a frequency of 2 kHz for the interfering sine Manual operation See Target CW Frequency AWGN on page 311 SOURce hw AWGN MODE Mode S...

Page 611: ...he entered C N value The noise power is set with command SOUR AWGN POW NOISe Parameters Carrier float Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dBm Example AWGN DISP MODE RF sets the display mode to RF AWGN POW CARR queries the carrier power Manual operation See Carrier Power on page 313 SOURce hw AWGN POWer MODE Mode In Additive Noise SOUR AWGN MODE ADD mode selects the mode for setting the noise power P...

Page 612: ...WGN POW RMOD NOIS Sets the noise interferer power The power of the carrier signal is derived from the selected C N value Noise Only mode The command sets the noise power Parameters Noise float Increment 0 01 Default unit dBm Example SOURce AWGN POWer NOISe queries the noise power in the system bandwidth Response 10 the noise power in the system bandwidth is 10 dBm Manual operation See Noise Power ...

Page 613: ...ARRier Example SOURce AWGN MODE ADD selects Additive Noise mode SOURce AWGN DISP MODE RF sets the display mode to RF SOURce AWGN POWer RMODe NOISe selects Reference Mode Noise The noise power is kept con stant when the C N value or Eb N0 value is changed The carrier power is adjusted Manual operation See Reference Mode AWGN on page 312 SOURce hw AWGN POWer SUM In Additive Noise and CW Interferer S...

Page 614: ... SOURce hw AWGN STATe State Activates or deactivates the white noise AWGN Averaged White Gaussian Noise Use the command SOURce hw AWGN MODE to define the mode the AWGN gen erator is working in Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SOURce AWGN STATe ON Manual operation See State AWGN on page 309 7 16 3 SOURce BB Subsystem This subsystem contains all commands for digital signal generation It is ...

Page 615: ...Fset 600 SOURce hw BB FOFFset FOffset Sets the frequency offset for the baseband signal The offset affects the signal on the baseband block output It shifts the useful baseband signal in the center frequency Parameters FOffset float Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example BB FOFF 2MHZ sets a frequency offset of 2 MHz Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 324 SOURce hw BB POFFset POffset The command s...

Page 616: ...tem 637 Common Settings SOURce hw BB ARBitrary PRESet 601 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary STATe 601 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary PRESet Sets all ARB generator parameters to their default values Example SOURce1 BB ARB PRESet Usage Event Manual operation See Set To Default on page 386 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary STATe State Activates the standard and deactivates all the other digital standards and digital modu lation m...

Page 617: ...l source must be entered with this command Parameters Clock float Increment 0 001 Example BB ARB CLOC SOUR INT selects the internal clock source for generating waveforms BB ARB CLOC 0 5 MHz sets the clock rate to 0 5 MHz Manual operation See Clock Frequency on page 387 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk MODE Mode The command enters the type of externally supplied clock BB ARB CLOCk SOURce EXTernal When ...

Page 618: ... COUPled AINTernal INTernal EXTernal AINTernal INTernal The internal clock reference is used EXTernal The external clock reference is supplied to the connector RST INTernal Example BB ARB CLOC SOUR EXT selects an external clock reference The clock is supplied via the connector BB ARB CLOC MODE SAMP enters clock type sample Manual operation See Clock Source on page 402 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk ...

Page 619: ...n MODE Example BB ARB CLOC SYNC MODE MAST the instrument is configured to work as a master one BB ARB CLOC SYNC EXEC all synchronization s settings are adjusted accordingly Usage Event Manual operation See Set Synchronization Settings on page 402 Trigger Settings The TRIGger subsystem contains the commands for setting the trigger SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger ARM EXECute 605 SOURce hw BB ARBitrar...

Page 620: ...BB ARB TRIG ARM EXEC waveform output is stopped BB ARB TRIG EXEC executes a trigger waveform output is started again Usage Event Manual operation See Arm on page 391 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXECute The command executes a trigger The internal trigger source must be selected using the command ARB TRIGger SOURce INTernal and a trigger mode other than AUTO must be selected using the command ARB...

Page 621: ... elapsing of the processing time and starts with sample 0 i e the complete signal is outputted This mode is recommended for triggering of short signal sequen ces with signal duration comparable with the processing time of the instrument RST ON Example BB ARB TRIG SOUR EXT sets external triggering BB ARB TRIG EXT SYNC OUTP ON enables synchronous output to external trigger Manual operation See Sync ...

Page 622: ...veform output Response RUN the waveform is output an external trigger was executed Usage Query only Manual operation See Running Stopped on page 391 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SLENgth SLength The command defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the Single trig ger mode The unit is defined with command SOUR BB ARB TRIG SLUNit It is pos sible to output deliberately just part of ...

Page 623: ...peration See Signal Duration Unit on page 390 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SMODe SMode The command selects the extended trigger mode for multi segment waveforms Parameters SMode SAME NEXT NSEam SEQuencer NSEam Next Segment Seamless RST NEXT Example SOUR BB ARB SEQ AUTO selects trigger mode AUTO SOUR BB ARB TRIG SMOD SAME the same segment of the waveform is output repeatedly Manual operation See ...

Page 624: ...t 0 01 RST 0 Default unit sample Example BB ARB TRIG SOUR EXT selects an external trigger BB ARB TRIG DEL 200 sets a delay of 200 samples for the trigger Manual operation See Trigger Delay on page 393 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger EXTernal 1 2 TDELay ExtTimeDelay Specifies the trigger delay for external triggering The value affects all external trigger signals Parameters ExtTimeDelay float Range ...

Page 625: ...e inhibited following a trigger event This command applies only in the case of external triggering Parameters Inhibit integer Range 0 to 67108863 RST 0 Default unit sample Example BB ARB TRIG SOUR EXT selects an external trigger BB ARB TRIG INH 200 sets a restart inhibit for 200 samples following a trigger event Manual operation See Trigger Inhibit on page 394 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger SEQuen...

Page 626: ...trigger event occurs After the trigger event the waveform is output once to the set sequence length SOUR BB ARB TRIG SLEN Every subse quent trigger event causes a restart RST AUTO Example BB ARB SEQ AAUT sets the Armed_auto trigger mode the device waits for the first trigger e g with TRG and then generates the signal continu ously Manual operation See Trigger Mode on page 390 Marker Settings The T...

Page 627: ...ignal corresponding to the Time Off Time On specifications in the commands ARB TRIGger OUTPut OFFTime and ARB TRIGger OUTPut ONTime is generated TRIGger A received internal or external trigger signal is output at the marker connector RST UNCHanged Example BB ARB TRIG OUTP2 MODE PULS selects the pulsed marker signal on output MARKER 2 BB ARB TRIG OUTP2 STAT ON activates the pulsed marker signal on ...

Page 628: ...ULSe The pulse frequency is derived by dividing the symbol rate by the divider Parameters Divider integer Range 2 to 1024 RST 2 Example BB ARB TRIG OUTP2 PULS DIV 2 sets the divider for the marker signal on output MARKER 2 to the value 2 BB ARB TRIG OUTP2 FREQ queries the resulting pulse frequency of the marker signal Response 66 000 the resulting pulse frequency is 66 kHz Manual operation See Mar...

Page 629: ... without restarting the marker and signal If a delay is entered in setting ON but is outside this range the maximum possible delay is set and an error message is output The setting always affects every marker Parameters Fixed 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example BB ARB TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range Manual operation See Fix marker delay to current ran...

Page 630: ...itrary TSIGnal SINE SAMPles 618 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal CIQ CREate SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle CREate SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE CREate Generates a signal and uses it as output straight away Example BB ARB TSIG SINE CRE generates a test sine signal and uses it as output straight away Usage Event Manual operation See Generate Signal RAM Sine Test Signal on page 405 SOUR...

Page 631: ...ange 0 to 1 Increment 0 001 RST 0 800 Default unit FS Example BB ARB TSIG RECT AMPL 0 5 sets the amplitude of the test signal Manual operation See Amplitude Rect Test Signal on page 405 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal RECTangle FREQuency Frequency Sets the frequency of the test signal Parameters Frequency float Range 100 to depends on hardware Increment 0 01 RST 1000 Example SOURce BB ARBitrary TSI...

Page 632: ... See Samples per Period Rect Test Signal on page 405 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TSIGnal SINE FREQuency Frequency Sets the frequency of the simple sinusoidal test signal This signal is used as output via the I channel A sine wave of the same frequency but optionally phase shifted is gener ated on the Q path ARB TSIGnal SINE POFFset Parameters Frequency float Range 100 to depends on hardware Increment 0...

Page 633: ...Example BB ARB TSIG SINE SAMP 100 sets a sample rate of 100 samples per period Manual operation See Samples per Period Sine Test Signal on page 404 SOURce BB ARB MCAR Subsystem The MCARrrier subsystem contains the commands for setting the Multi Carrier Wave form Generator Section Chapter 7 4 Waveform and List Format on page 511 describes the ARB waveform format and how it is used to transmit wavef...

Page 634: ...628 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier POWer STEP 628 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier POWer STARt 629 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier STARt 629 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier STOP 629 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier STATe 630 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier OFILe 630 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier PRESet 630 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCA...

Page 635: ...ing Total baseband bandwidth Number of carriers 1 The total baseband bandwidth is 120 or 60 MHz depending on the installed options Note In order to avoid wrap around problems the effective Carrier Spacing might be slightly modified The Carrier Spacing is rounded in that way that the carrier closest to the center RF frequency shows no phase jump assuming that the carrier is unmodu lated For odd num...

Page 636: ...ay of 50 us for carrier 15 Manual operation See Delay on page 435 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch FILE File Selects the file with I Q data to be modulated onto the selected carrier Parameters File file name Example BB ARB MCAR CARR15 FILE var user IQ_wcdma selects file IQ_wcdma The data of the file is modulated onto carrier 15 Manual operation See File on page 435 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary...

Page 637: ...f the crest factor is disabled SOURce BB ARB MCARrier CFACtor MODE OFF Parameters Phase float Range 0 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit DEG Example BB ARB MCAR CARR15 PHAS 90 DEG sets a start phase of 90 for carrier 15 Manual operation See Phase on page 435 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier CARRier ch POWer Power The command sets the gain of the selected carrier Parameters Power float Rang...

Page 638: ...omatic setting for minimizing or maximizing the crest factor The Phase setting command BB ARB MCAR CARR PHAS is in use MIN The crest factor is minimized by internally calculating optimized carrier phases The Phase setting command BB ARB MCAR CARR PHAS is invalid MAX The crest factor is maximized by internally calculating optimized carrier phases The Phase setting command BB ARB MCAR CARR PHAS is i...

Page 639: ...ng is enabled BB ARB MCAR CLIP STAT ON When the cut off frequency is set as half of the output sample rate a final lowpass filter improves the spectrum of the clipped multicarrier signal but may also increase the resulting crest factor Parameters Cutoff float Range 0 to 50E6 Increment 0 01 RST 50E6 Default unit MHz Example BB ARB MCAR CLIP STAT ON enables clipping BB ARB MCAR CLIP CUT 50 MHz sets ...

Page 640: ... CLOad Creates and loads a multi carrier waveform using the current entries of the carrier table This multi carrier waveform is saved with the file name specified with command SOUR BB ARB MCAR OFIL The file extension is wv Digital standard ARB is activated the new multi carrier waveform is loaded and is output in accordance to the trigger settings Example MMEM CDIR var user waveform sets the defau...

Page 641: ... multi_wv1 defines the file name multi_wv1 wv for the multi carrier wave form BB ARB MCAR CRE creates multi carrier waveform multi_wv1 wv Usage Event Manual operation See Create on page 431 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier DELay STEP Step The command sets the step width by which the start delays of the carriers in the defined carrier range will be incremented Parameters Step float Rang...

Page 642: ... the carrier range Manual operation See Delay Start on page 434 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier EDIT CARRier EXECute The command adopts the settings for the carrier range which has been defined using the BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR commands Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR STAR 4 the carrier range starts at carrier 2 BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR STOP 20 the carrier range stops at carrier 20 BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR ...

Page 643: ...ary MCARrier EDIT CARRier PHASe STARt Start The command sets the start phase for the individual carriers in the defined carrier range If the command BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR PHAS STEP is used to define a step width the phase entered here applies only to the starting carrier The phases of the remaining carriers are stepped up or down by the phase value specified in the BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR PHAS STEP ...

Page 644: ...tep width the power entered here applies only to the starting carrier The power of the remaining carriers is stepped up or down by the power specified in the BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR POW STEP command Parameters Start float Range 80 to 0 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dB Example BB ARB MCAR EDIT CARR POW 50 dB sets the power of the carriers in the carrier range to 50 dB Manual operation See Gain St...

Page 645: ...or SOUR BB ARB MCAR CREate The file extension is wv Parameters OFile string Example MMEM CDIR var user waveform sets the default directory BB ARB MCAR OFIL mcar1_2 defines the file name mcar1_2 wv for the multi carrier wave form file Manual operation See File on page 431 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier PRESet Sets all ARB multi carrier parameters to their default values Example SOURce1 BB ARB MCAR...

Page 646: ...rame on page 425 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SETTing LOAD Filename Loads the settings file If a settings file with the specified name does not yet exist it is created The file extension may be omitted Only files with the file extension arb_multcarr will be loaded or created Setting parameters Filename string Example BB ARB MCAR SETT LOAD var user new creates settings file new arb_multcarr Usag...

Page 647: ...ion See Fast Save on page 162 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier TIME Time Sets the user defined signal period This setting is only possible for Signal Period Mode User BB ARB MCAR TIME MODE USER Parameters Time float Range 0 to 1E9 Increment 1E 9 RST 0 Default unit s Example BB ARB MCAR TIME MODE USER selects Signal Period Mode User BB ARB MCAR TIME 10 s sets a signal period of 10 seconds Manual ope...

Page 648: ...E LONG selects signal period mode long Manual operation See Signal Period Mode on page 428 SOURce BB ARB WAV Subsystem The WAVeform subsystem contains the commands for working with waveform files SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform CATalog 633 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform CATalog LENGth 634 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform CLOCk 634 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform DATA 635 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAV...

Page 649: ... waveform files in default directory Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example MMEM CDIR var user waveform sets the default directory BB ARB WAV CAT reads out all the files in the default directory Response sin1 wave the directory contains the waveform files sin1 wv and wave wv BB ARB WAV CAT LEN Response 2 Usage Query only SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform CLOCk Filename Clock Appends information on the ARB...

Page 650: ...ilename See Chapter 7 4 Waveform and List Format on page 511 By default the waveform files are saved in the default directory of the instrument var user Lists To access waveform files located in another directory the complete file path and file name are required Parameters Filename string Specifies the name of the waveform file the binary data will be copied to The file extension wv may be omitted...

Page 651: ...e file extension may be omitted Only files with the file extension wv will be deleted Setting parameters Filename string Example BB ARB WAV DEL var user wave1 wv deletes waveform file wave1 wv Usage Setting only SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform FREE Queries the free disk space on the default path of the instrument s harddisk Return values Free integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 1 Example MMEM CDIR var ...

Page 652: ...selects waveform file and loads it Manual operation See Load Waveform on page 386 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform TAG Queries the content of the specified tag of the waveform file selected with the com mand SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform SELect See also Chapter 7 4 Waveform and List Format on page 511 Return values Tag string Example BB ARB WAV SEL var user wave1 wv selects waveform file and load...

Page 653: ...itrary WSEGment CONFigure SELect 644 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CREate 645 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NAME 645 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT 646 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT EXECute 646 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment NEXT SOURce 646 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment SEQuence APPend 647 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment SEQuence SELect 648 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment This ...

Page 654: ...ave form BB ARB WSEG CLO var user multi_sin inf_mswv creates multi segment waveform mseg1_2 wv using the set tings of the configuration file multi_sin inf_mswv The new multi segment waveform is loaded and ARB is activa ted Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save List on page 418 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure BLANk APPend SampCount Frequency Adds a blank segment to the multi segmen...

Page 655: ...lit1 multi2 the directory contains the configuration files multi1 inf_mswv and multi2 inf_mswv Usage Query only Manual operation See Load List on page 418 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk Clock This command defines the clock rate used for multi segment waveform output in case of Clock Mode User BB ARB WSEG CONF CLOCk MODE USER Parameters Clock float Increment 1E 3 RST max SampleRate...

Page 656: ...NFigure COMMent Comment This command enters a comment for the configuration file The configuration file must be specified with command BB ARB WSEG CONF SEL Parameters Comment string Example BB ARB WSEG CONF COMM 3gpp_up enters comment 3gpp_up Manual operation See Comment on page 417 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure DELete Filename Deletes the configuration file The configuration files are...

Page 657: ...signals in the individual segment waveform files are not considered Parameters Mode OFF MRK1 MRK2 MRK3 MRK4 OFF No additional marker is generated MRK1 MRK2 MRK3 MRK4 Generates a restart marker signal at the beginning of each seg ment for the corresponding marker The segment begin is defined by the low high slope of the marker This applies for switching between two segments as well as in case of se...

Page 658: ...e IGNore TAKE IGNore The marker information carried in the individual segment wave form files is not considered TAKE The output waveform file contains the marker information as configured in the individual waveform files RST TAKE Example BB ARB WSEG CONF SEL ConfComm BB ARB WSEG CONF MARK MODE TAKE Manual operation See Segment Marker on page 416 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure OFILe OFil...

Page 659: ...SEGment CONFigure SEGMent CATalog Queries the segments of the currently selected configuration file Return values Catalog string Example MMEM CDIR var user waveform sets the default directory BB ARB WSEG CONF SEL multi_sin selects the configuration file multi_sin inf_mswv BB ARB WSEG CONF SEGM CAT queries the segments of the selected configuration file Response arb4 arb2 The configuration file inc...

Page 660: ...WSEG CONF SEL new creates the configuration file new inf_mswv in the default directory BB ARB WSEG CONF SEGM APP arb1 wv includes waveform arb1 wv as segment 1 in the configuration file The waveform must be available in the default directory BB ARB WSEG CONF OFIL multi_wv1 defines the file name multi_wv1 wv for the multi segment waveform BB ARB WSEG CRE var user new inf_mswv creates multi segment ...

Page 661: ...ry WSEGment NEXT EXECute Triggers manually switchover to the subsequent segment in the mutli segment file A manual trigger can be executed only when an internal next segment source BB ARB WSEG NEXT SOUR INT has been selected To perform a switchover to any segment within the multi segment file select the next segment with the command BB ARB WSEG NEXT This command is disabled if a sequencing play li...

Page 662: ...tes deactivates the appended segment RST ON Segment integer indicates the number of the segment as in the multi segment waveform file Range 0 to SegmentCount 1 Count integer defines how many times this segment is repeated Range 1 to 65535 Next NEXT BLANk ENDLess SEG0 SEG1 SEG31 0 maxSegment determines the action after completing the current segment like for instance which segment is processed afte...

Page 663: ...n DM General Remote Control Commands The following section contains the commands for generating the digital modulation sig nal Common Settings 648 Clock Settings 652 Trigger Settings 654 Marker Settings 661 Filter Settings 664 Modulation Settings 667 Power Ramp 671 Common Settings SOURce hw BB DM PATTern 648 SOURce hw BB DM PRBS LENGth 649 SOURce hw BB DM PRESet 649 SOURce hw BB DM SOURce 649 SOUR...

Page 664: ...9 Example BB DM SOUR PRBS The internal pseudo random generator is used as the data source BB DM PRBS 9 An internal pseudo random sequence of 511 bits will be gener ated Manual operation See Data Source on page 353 SOURce hw BB DM PRESet Sets the default settings for digital modulation RST values specified for the com mands Not affected is the state set with the command SOURce hw BB DM STATe Exampl...

Page 665: ...RATe SRate Sets the symbol rate The value range is dependent on the selected modulation type On changing to an FSK modulation type excessively high values are automatically limited to the maximum value that can be set for FSK see data sheet The symbol rate can be entered in Hz kHz MHz or Symb s kSymb s and MSymb s When a standard is selected DM STANdard the symbol rate is automatically set to the ...

Page 666: ...ace TFTS APCOPH1C4fm APCOPH1CQpsk APCOPH2HCpm APCOPH2HDQpsk APCOPH2HD8PSKW APCOPH2HD8PSKN APCOPH1Lsm APCOPH1Wcqpsk RST GSM Example BB DM STAN DECT Selects digital modulation according to the DECT standard Manual operation See Set acc to Standard on page 355 SOURce hw BB DM STATe State Enables disables digital modulation Switching on digital modulation turns off all the other digital standards in t...

Page 667: ...hw BB DM CLOCk SYNChronization MODE 653 SOURce hw BB DM CLOCk SYNChronization EXECute 654 SOURce hw BB DM CLOCk MODE Mode The command enters the type of externally supplied clock BB DM CLOCk SOURce EXTernal Parameters Mode SYMBol MSYMbol RST SYMBol Example BB DM CLOC MODE SYMB selects clock type Symbols i e the supplied clock is a symbol clock Manual operation See Clock Mode on page 378 SOURce hw ...

Page 668: ...k Parameters Source INTernal EXTernal INTernal The internal clock reference is used EXTernal The external clock reference is supplied to the CLOCK connec tor RST INTernal Example BB DM CLOC SOUR INT selects the internal clock reference Manual operation See Clock Source on page 378 SOURce hw BB DM CLOCk SYNChronization MODE Mode Selects the synchronization mode This parameter is used to enable gene...

Page 669: ...nd BB DM CLOC SYNC MODE Example BB DM CLOC SYNC MODE MAST the instrument is configured to work as a master one BB DM CLOC SYNC EXEC all synchronization s settings are adjusted accordingly Usage Event Manual operation See Set Synchronization Settings on page 377 Trigger Settings The numeric suffix to OUTPut distinguishes between the available markers SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger ARM EXECute 655 SOURce h...

Page 670: ...e Event Manual operation See Arm on page 373 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXECute Executes a trigger The internal trigger source must be selected using the com mand BB DM TRIG SOUR INT and a trigger mode other than AUTO must be selected using the command BB DM TRIG SEQ Example BB DM TRIG SOUR INT sets internal triggering BB DM TRIG SEQ RETR sets Retrigger mode i e every trigger event causes signal gen ...

Page 671: ...ignal duration comparable with the processing time of the instrument RST 1 Example BB DM TRIG SOUR EXT sets external triggering BB DM TRIG EXT SYNC OUTP ON enables synchrounous output to external trigger Manual operation See Sync Output to External Trigger on page 374 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed Fixed The command restricts the marker delay setting range to the dynamic range In this ...

Page 672: ...16 symbols for the signal on connector MARKER 2 Manual operation See Marker x Delay on page 376 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay MINimum SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay MAXimum Queries the maximum marker delay for setting BB DM TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON Return values Maximum float Range 0 to 16777215 Increment 1E 3 RST 2000 Example BB DM TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON restricts the marker signal d...

Page 673: ...queries the current status of signal generation Response RUN the signal is generated an external trigger was executed Usage Query only Manual operation See Running Stopped on page 373 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger SLENgth SLength Defines the length of the signal sequence to be output in the Single trigger mode Parameters SLength integer Range 1 to 4294967295 RST 1000 Default unit symbol Example BB DM SE...

Page 674: ...ple SOURce1 BB DM TRIGger SEQuence RETR SOURce1 BB DM TRIGger SOURce EXT SOURce1 BB DM TRIGger DELay UNIT TIME SOURce1 BB DM TRIGger EXTernal TDELay 100 SOURce1 BB DM TRIGger EXTernal RDELay Response 100 SOURce1 BB DM TRIGger DELay UNIT SAMPle SOURce1 BB DM TRIGger EXTernal DELay Response 27 08 Manual operation See External Delay Unit on page 375 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal ch DELay Delay Set...

Page 675: ...vent is delayed for Return values ResTimeDelaySec float Range 0 to 688 Increment 0 25E 9 RST 0 Example See SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger DELay UNIT on page 659 Usage Query only Manual operation See Actual Trigger Delay on page 376 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal ch INHibit Inhibit Sets the number of symbols by which a restart is to be inhibited following a trigger event This command applies only in the...

Page 676: ...event causes a restart Signal genera tion is stopped with comman SOUR BB DM TRIG ARM EXEC and started again when a trigger event occurs SINGle The modulation signal is generated only when a trigger event occurs After the trigger event the signal is generated once to the set sequence length SOUR BB DM TRIG SLEN Every subsequent trigger event caused a restart RST AUTO Example BB DM SEQ AAUT sets the...

Page 677: ...ATio A regular marker signal corresponding to the Time Off Time On specifications in the commands SOURce BB DM TRIGger OUTPut OFFT and SOURce BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ONT is generated TRIGger A received internal or external trigger signal is output at the marker connector RST RATio Example BB DM TRIG OUTP2 MODE PULS selects the pulsed marker signal on output MARKER 2 Manual operation See Marker x on p...

Page 678: ...r signal Parameters Pattern numeric 0 is marker off 1 is marker on RST H2 BitCount integer Range 1 to 64 RST 2 Example BB DM TRIG OUTP2 PATT B000000011111111 15 BB DM TRIG OUTP2 MODE PATT Manual operation See Marker x on page 376 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe DIVider Divider Sets the divider for Pulse marker mode SOUR BB DM TRIGr OUTP MODE PULSe The resulting pulse frequency is derived b...

Page 679: ... 664 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer OSAMpling AUTO 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter COSine ROLLoff 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter GAUSs 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter LPASs 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter LPASSEVM 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter PGAuss 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter RCOSine 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter SPHase 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter APC...

Page 680: ... hw BB DM FILTer PARameter GAUSs Gauss SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter LPASs LPass SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter LPASSEVM LPassEvm SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter PGAuss PGauss SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter RCOSine RCosine SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter SPHase SPhase SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter APCO25 Apco25 The command sets the roll off factor for filter type APCO25 On selecting fi...

Page 681: ...ts the bandwidth of the cosine filter Parameters FiltParm float Range 400 to 25E6 Increment 1E 3 RST 270833 333 Example BB DM FILT TYPE COS BB DM FILT PAR COS BAND 7200 Manual operation See Bandwidth on page 360 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter APCO25Lsm GAUSs FiltParm SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter APCO25Lsm LOWPass FiltParm Sets the cut off frequency for the lowpass gauss filter Parameters Fil...

Page 682: ...Rce hw DM FILTer PARameter Parameter Sets the filter parameter of the currently selected filter type To set the filter type use command SOURce hw BB DM FILTer TYPE on page 667 Parameters Parameter float Range 0 05 to 2 5 Increment 0 01 RST 0 35 Example BB DM FILT TYPE COS DM FILT PAR 0 5 sets 0 5 roll off factor for the cosine filter Modulation Settings SOURce hw BB DM AQPSk ANGLe 667 SOURce hw BB...

Page 683: ...xample BB DM FORM ASK selects the ASK modulation type BB DM ASK DEPT 50 PCT sets a modulation depth of 50 percent Manual operation See ASK Depth on page 357 SOURce hw BB DM CODing Coding The command selects the modulation coding If the modulation type selected BB DM FORM is not possible with the coding that has been set it is automatically set to OFF BB DM COD OFF When a standard is selected BB DM...

Page 684: ...QAM256 QAM1024 MSK FSK2 FSK4 USER FSKVar QAM128 QEDGe QAM16EDge QAM32EDge AQPSk QAM4096 RST MSK Example BB DM FORM QPSK selects modulation type QPSK Manual operation See Modulation Type on page 357 SOURce hw BB DM FSK DEViation Deviation Sets the frequency deviation when FSK modulation is selected The range of values depends on the symbol rate that is set see data sheet and the maximum deviation i...

Page 685: ... unit Hz Example BB DM FORM FSKV selects Variable FSK modulation BB DM FSK VAR TYPE FSK16 selects 16FSK modulation BB DM FSK VAR SYMB0 DEV 135000 sets the frequency deviation of the least significant symbol to 135 kHz Manual operation See Deviation xxxx on page 359 SOURce hw BB DM FSK VARiable TYPE Type The command selects the modulation type for Variable FSK Parameters Type FSK4 FSK8 FSK16 RST FS...

Page 686: ...PRAMp TIME 673 SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp STATe 673 SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp ATTenuation Attenuation Sets the level attenuation for signal ranges that are flagged with level attribute attenu ated by the LEV_ATT control signal Parameters Attenuation float Range 0 to 50 Increment 0 1 RST 15 Default unit dB Example BB DM PRAM ATT 15 dB sets a level attenuation of 15 dB Manual operation See Attenuation on pag...

Page 687: ...t 0 01 RST 0 Default unit symbol Example BB DM PRAM FDEL 1 The falling edge starts 1 symbol later Manual operation See Fall Delay on page 371 SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp RDELay RDelay Sets the delay in the rising edge A positive value gives rise to a delay and a negative value causes an advance Parameters RDelay float Range 0 to 4 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit symbol Example BB DM PRAM RDEL 1 The ri...

Page 688: ...efined selected and enabled with the aid of SOURce BB DM CLISt commands RST INTernal Example BB DM PRAM SOUR INT enables the use of internal control signals for power ramp con trol SOURce hw BB DM PRAMp TIME Time Sets the power ramping rise time and fall time for a burst Parameters Time float Range 0 25 to 16 Increment 0 01 RST 1 Default unit symbol Example BB DM PRAM TIME 2 sets a time of 2 symbo...

Page 689: ...o will cause an error message If the file extension is changed in any other way e g by directly accessing the file system the lists are no longer recognized and therefore invalid The CLISt commands always create a binary control list even if ASCII format is specified Therefore to create a wv file with R S WinIQSIM2 using a control list use the input control list in ASCII format Refer to the exampl...

Page 690: ...6 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt STORe 686 SOURce hw BB DM CLISt CATalog SOURce hw BB DM DLISt CATalog SOURce hw BB DM FLISt CATalog SOURce hw BB DM MLISt CATalog Queries the user mapping lists present in the default directory The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory When the names of the files are returned they are separated by commas The command only reads out files with the va...

Page 691: ...cified in which case the source file is copied into the file list name in the specified directory The file exten sion may be omitted Only files with the file extension dm_iqc will be copied see also Table 7 2 Setting parameters Filename string Example BB DM DLIS d_list1 selects data list d_list1 BB DM DLIS COPY d_list2 copies the content of data list d_list1 into data list d_list2 Any existing con...

Page 692: ...rmination character mode to EOI control data message only Then a random LF in the data sequence is not interpreted as end i e prematurely terminating the data transmission The command LTER STANdard resets the mode For query purposes the command FORMat ASCii PACKed can be used to switch between the formats The byte sequence is defined in the IEC bus standard as most significant byte first Note C Li...

Page 693: ...urrently selected list Return values Points integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example BB DM CLIS SEL c_list1 selects control list c_list1 BB DM CLIS POIN queries the number of lines in the control list Response 20 the control list consists of 20 lines Usage Query only SOURce hw BB DM CLISt SELect Filename The command selects the control list in the default directory The default directory is set usi...

Page 694: ...The query reads out the data part of the data list If the query is expanded by using the two parameters start and length the list is read out in smaller sections Start and Length are expressed in bits Without the parameters the total length is always read out starting from address 1 The command FORMat ASCii PACKed can be used to select the data format The byte sequence is defined in the IEC bus st...

Page 695: ...0 1 1 0 1 adds the specified numeric data to the existing data in data list d_list2 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Data List Editor on page 364 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt DELete Filename The command deletes the specified data list from the default directory The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case the files in the specified directory...

Page 696: ...ed The modulation data in this data list is used when the data source is selected using the command SOURce BB DM SOURce DLISt Parameters Select list name Example BB DM DLIS SEL d_list2 selects data list d_list2 Manual operation See Functions for handling of data lists on page 166 SOURce hw BB DM FLISt DELete Filename Deletes the secified user filter file The default directory is set using command ...

Page 697: ...ILT TYPE USER selects the User filter type MMEM CDIR var user Filter_List sets the default directory for the user defined filters BB DM FLIS SEL user_filter3 selects the user defined filter Manual operation See Load User Filter on page 361 SOURce hw BB DM MLISt DELete Filename Deletes the secified user mapping file The default directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be speci...

Page 698: ... list with the specified name does not yet exist it is created The file extension may be omitted Only files with the file extension vam will be selected or created Parameters Filename string Example BB DM MLIS SEL c_list1 selects the user mapping list c_list1 Manual operation See Load User Mapping on page 357 SOURce hw BB DM SETTing CATalog Reads out the files with Custom Digital Modulation settin...

Page 699: ...settings The directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case the files in the specified directory are read The file extension may be omit ted Only files with the file extension dm will be loaded Setting parameters Filename string Example BB DM STAN ULIS LOAD DM_1 loads file DM_1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save Recall on page 353 SOURce hw BB D...

Page 700: ...d MMEM CDIRectory Only files with the file extension dm_stu will be listed Return values Catalog string Example MMEM CDIR var user dig_mod sets the default directory BB DM STAN ULIS CAT reads out all the files with Digital Standard settings in the default directory Response DM_QAM the file DM_QAM with Digital Standard settings is available Usage Query only Manual operation See Save Recall User on ...

Page 701: ...ettings into the selected file The directory is set using command MMEM CDIRectory A path can also be specified in which case the files in the specified directory are read Only the file name has to be entered User Standards are stored as files with the specific file extensions dm_stu Setting parameters Filename string Example BB DM STAN ULIS STOR DM_QAM stores the current Digital Standard settings ...

Page 702: ...signal is determined Maximum resolution corre sponds to a display covering the entire signal bandwidth The higher the resolution is the shorter the length of the displayed signal segment will be for the specified record ing depth Parameters Mode AUTO FULL USER AUTO The resolution is set to an optimum value on the basis of the sig nal and display type FULL The resolution is set such that the displa...

Page 703: ... Parameters User float Range 0 01 to 100 Increment 0 01 RST 10 Default unit PCT Example BB GRAP SRAT MODE USER sets the sample rate mode BB GRAP SRAT USER 20 sets the sample rate factor Manual operation See Graphics Sample Rate on page 176 SOURce hw BB GRAPhics STATe State Activates deactivates the selected graphical display Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example BB GRAP STAT ON activates the g...

Page 704: ...urce Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 176 7 16 3 5 SOURce BB IMPairment Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the digital I Q impairments Included in this section is also the description of command SOURce BB IQOutput SOURce that determined the source for the I Q output con nectors SOURce hw BB IMPairment DELay 689 SOURce hw BB IMPairment IQRatio MAGNitude 690 SOURce hw BB I...

Page 705: ... dB Parameters IqRatio float Range 1 to 1 Increment 1E 4 RST 0 Example BB IMP IQR 3 PCT sets the imbalance to 3 percent BB IMP IQR queries the imbalance Response 0 259000 the value is returned in dB Manual operation See Gain Imbalance Digital Impairments on page 306 SOURce hw BB IMPairment LEAKage I I This command sets the carrier leakage amplitude for the I signal component Parameters I float Ran...

Page 706: ...the quadrature offset to 5 degrees Manual operation See Quadrature Offset Digital Impairments on page 307 SOURce hw BB IMPairment SKEW Skew Sets the time offset between the I and Q vectors In an I Q modulator without I Q skew the I and Q vectors are aligned to the marker With an I Q skew both vectors are shifted relative to the marker so that the offset of each of the vectors to the marker will be...

Page 707: ...timization is reached by compensation for I Q skew QHIGh Optimization is reached by compensation for I Q skew and fre quency response correction RST FAST Example BB IMP OPT MODE FAST sets the optimization mode Fast Manual operation See Optimization Mode Digital Impairments on page 307 SOURce hw BB IMPairment OPTimization STATe State Activates and deactivates internal compensation of signal distort...

Page 708: ...CW CARRier COUNt 694 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST PHASe 694 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST POWer 695 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST STATe 696 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier PHASe 696 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier POWer 697 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier SPACing 697 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier STATe 698 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor 698 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor ACTual 698 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor MODE 699 SOURce h...

Page 709: ... the total bandwidth is not respected when entering the number of carriers The number of carriers entered therefore defines the maximum carrier spacing BB MCCW CARRier SPACing Parameters Count integer Range 1 to 8192 RST 64 Example BB MCCW CARR COUN 10 sets 10 CW carriers for the multi carrier signal Manual operation See Number of Carriers on page 439 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST PHASe Phas0 Pha...

Page 710: ...r Pow0 Pow1 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier LIST POWer Start Count Sets the power of the carrier with the aid of a value list The first value in the list is assigned to the carrier with index 0 the second value to the carrier with index 1 etc The maximum length corresponds to the maximum number of multi carriers There is no need to enter all the values every time Values not set by the value list are set...

Page 711: ...the values every time Values not set by the value list are set with the default values provided they have already been explicitly set by a previous com mand If this is the case the values continue to apply until overwritten Setting parameters Stat0 Stat1 ON OFF ON OFF Query parameters Start integer Range 0 to lastCarrier Count integer Range 1 to lastCarrier Return values State State select Example...

Page 712: ...mple BB MCCW CARR POW 15 50 dB sets the power of carrier 15 to 50 dB Manual operation See Carrier Table on page 442 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier SPACing Spacing The command sets the carrier spacing The carriers are generated symmetrically around the center carrier The total band width is calculated as Number of carriers 1 Carrier spacing and must not exceed the system bandwidth of the instrument see ...

Page 713: ... channel index 1 in the table Parameters CarrierIndex integer Range 0 to lastCarrier State select RST 0 Example BB MCCW CARR STAT 15 ON switches carrier 16 on Manual operation See Carrier Table on page 442 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor CFactor Sets the desired crest factor for the multi carrier signal on selection of the command SOUR BB MCCW CFAC MODE SLOW Parameters CFactor float Range 0 to 30 Increm...

Page 714: ...The computation time is independent of the number of carriers In other carrier configurations the achievable crest factor is worse SLOW The crest factor entered using SOURceBB MCCW CFACtor is maintained for all carrier configurations by means of automatic settings The computation time depends on the number of carri ers and on the crest factor that has been set Computation time increases only when ...

Page 715: ...CCW EDIT CARR STOP 400 the carrier range stops at carrier 400 BB MCCW EDIT CARR STAT ON sets all the carriers in the carrier range to ON BB MCCW EDIT CARR EXEC adopts the settings for all the carriers in the carrier range BB MCCW STAT starts generation of the multi carrier signal Carriers 4 to 400 are in the ON state Usage Event Manual operation See Accept on page 441 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRie...

Page 716: ...n by the phase value specified in the BB MCCW EDIT CARR PHAS STEP command The phase settings are only valid if optimization of the crest factor is disabled SOURce BB MCCW CFACtor MODE OFF Parameters Start float Range 0 to 359 99 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example BB MCCW EDIT CARR PHAS 90 DEG sets a start phase of 90 for the carriers in the carrier range Manual operation See Phase Start on page 441 SOUR...

Page 717: ...n See Power Start on page 441 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STARt Start Selects the first carrier in the carrier range to which the settings with the BB MCCW EDIT CARR commands shall apply Parameters Start integer Range 0 to 8191 RST 0 Example BB MCCW EDIT CARR STAR 4 the carrier range starts at carrier 4 Manual operation See Carrier Start on page 440 SOURce hw BB MCCW EDIT CARRier STATe State Sw...

Page 718: ...ibit 707 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger SEQuence 707 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger ARM EXECute Stops signal generation for trigger modes Armed_Auto and Armed_Retrigger A subse quent internal or external trigger event restart signal generation Example BB MCCW TRIG SOUR INT sets internal triggering BB MCCW TRIG SEQ ARET sets Armed_Retrigger mode i e every trigger event causes sig nal generation to restart BB...

Page 719: ...e signal calculation starts simultaneously with the external trigger event but because of the instrument s processing time the first samples are cut off and no signal is outputted After elapsing of the internal processing time the output signal is syn chronous to the trigger event OFF The signal output begins after elapsing of the processing time and starts with sample 0 i e the complete signal is...

Page 720: ...B MCCW TRIG INH 200 sets a restart inhibit for 200 samples following a trigger event SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger RMODe Queries the current status of signal generation for all trigger modes with Multi Carrier CW on Return values RMode STOP RUN RUN The signal is generated A trigger event occurred in the triggered mode STOP The signal is not generated A trigger event did not occur in the triggered mode...

Page 721: ...e SOURBB MCCW TRIG SLEN 200 sets a sequence length of 200 samples The first 200 samples of the current waveform will be output after the next trigger event Manual operation See Signal Duration on page 445 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger SOURce Source Selects the trigger source Parameters Source INTernal EXTernal INTernal manual trigger or TRG EXTernal trigger signal on the TRIG connector RST INTernal Ex...

Page 722: ...hibit Specifies the number of samples by which a restart is to be inhibited following a trigger event This command applies only in the case of external triggering Parameters Inhibit integer Range 0 to 67108863 RST 0 Example BB MCCW TRIG SOUR EXT selects an external trigger BB MCCW TRIG INH 200 sets a restart inhibit for 200 samples following a trigger event Manual operation See Trigger Inhibit on ...

Page 723: ...tarted again when a trigger event occurs SINGle The multi carrier signal is output only when a trigger event occurs After the trigger event the signal is output once to the set sequence length SOURBB MCCW TRIG SLEN Every subse quent trigger event causes a restart RST AUTO Example BB MCCW SEQ AAUT sets the Armed_auto trigger mode the device waits for the first trigger e g with TRG and then generate...

Page 724: ...B MCCW TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range Manual operation See Fix marker delay to current range on page 449 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay Delay Sets the delay between the signal on the marker outputs and the start of the signals expressed in terms of samples Command BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed ON can be used to restrict the...

Page 725: ...on on page 448 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch DELay MINimum Queries the minimum marker delay for setting BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut DELay FIXed ON Return values Minimum float Range 0 to 16777215 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Example BB MCCW TRIG OUTP DEL FIX ON restricts the marker signal delay setting range to the dynamic range BB MCCW TRIG OUTP DEL MIN queries the minimum of the dynamic range Response 0...

Page 726: ...ons in the commands SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut OFFT and SOURce BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ONT is generated TRIGger A received internal or external trigger signal is output at the marker connector RST RESTart Example BB MCCW TRIG OUTP2 MODE PULS selects the pulsed marker signal on output MARKER 2 Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 448 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch OFFTime OffTime SOURce ...

Page 727: ...er Parameters Divider integer Range 2 to 1024 RST 2 Example BB MCCW TRIG OUTP2 PULS DIV 2 sets the divider for the marker signal on output MARKER 2 to the value 2 BB MCCW TRIG OUTP2 FREQ queries the resulting pulse frequency of the marker signal Response 66 000 the resulting pulse frequency is 66 kHz Manual operation See Marker Mode on page 448 SOURce hw BB MCCW TRIGger OUTPut ch PULSe FREQuency Q...

Page 728: ...ation MODE 714 SOURce hw BB MCCW CLOCk SYNChronization EXECute 715 SOURce hw BB MCCW CLOCk MODE Mode Sets the type of externally supplied clock BB MCCW CLOCk SOURce EXTernal When MSAMple is used a multiple of the sample clock is supplied via the CLOCK con nector and the sample clock is derived internally from this The multiplier is entered with the command BB MCCW CLOCk MULTiplier Parameters Mode ...

Page 729: ...al AINTernal INTernal The internal clock reference is used EXTernal The external clock reference is supplied to the CLOCK connec tor RST INTernal Example BB MCCW CLOC SOUR EXT selects an external clock reference The clock is supplied via the CLOCK connector Manual operation See Clock Source on page 449 SOURce hw BB MCCW CLOCk SYNChronization MODE Mode Selects the synchronization mode This paramete...

Page 730: ...NChronization MODE Example BB MCCW CLOC SYNC MODE MAST the instrument is configured to work as a master one BB MCCW CLOC SYNC EXEC all synchronization s settings are adjusted accordingly Usage Event Manual operation See Set Synchronization Settings on page 449 7 16 3 7 SOURce BB PROGress Subsystem General Commands In the R S SMBV some calculation processes may take longer time While operating the ...

Page 731: ...ce to a digital standard or the calculation of a multi carrier or multi segment waveform file Return values WSegment integer Indicates the task progress in percent Range 0 to 100 RST 100 Example see Example Querying the status of the Create Waveform file process on page 715 Usage Query only SOURce hw BB PROGress MCODer DM FILTer Queries the status of an applied offline filtering like for example d...

Page 732: ... POWer RMS 720 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe ACTual 721 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe FIFO STATus 721 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe SOURce 721 SOURce hw BBIN STATe 722 SOURce hw BBIN ALEVel EXECute This command starts measuring the input signal The measurement estimates the crest factor and the peak power Example BBIN ALEV EXEC starts measuring the input signal Usage Event Manual operation See Auto Level Set on page 456 SOU...

Page 733: ...anges automatically Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example BBIN DIG ASET STAT ON switches on automatic adjustment of the baseband input signal Manual operation See DIG IQ Auto Setting on page 455 SOURce hw BBIN FOFFset FOffset Enters the frequency offset for the external baseband signal The complex I Q bandwidth of the shifted useful signal must not exceed the total avail able baseband bandwidt...

Page 734: ... SOURce hw BBIN OLOad HOLD RESet This command executes a reset of the Overload Hold State and LED Example BBIN MODE DIG selects the digital baseband input mode BBIN OLO HOLD RES resets the overload hold state Usage Event SOURce hw BBIN OLOad HOLD STATe This command queries an overload since the last reset for evaluating the measure ment The Overload Hold state can be reset via the Reset command or...

Page 735: ... Usage Query only Manual operation See Overload on page 457 SOURce hw BBIN POWer PEAK Peak This command enters the peak level of the external baseband signal relative to full scale of 0 5 V in terms of dB full scale Parameters Peak float Range 60 to 3 02 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dBfs Example BBIN POW PEAK 2 enters the peak level of 2 dBfs Manual operation See Peak Level on page 456 SOURce...

Page 736: ...w The external sample rate frequency is too high which causes an overflow in signal transmission URUN Underrun The external sample rate frequency is too low which causes an underrun in signal transmission RST OK Example BBIN SRAT FIFO STAT queries the FIFO Status of the sample rate Usage Query only Manual operation See FIFO Status on page 455 SOURce hw BBIN SRATe SOURce Source This command queries...

Page 737: ...table values being added to the output level for the respective RF fre quency In the R S SMBV this subsystem is used to select transfer and activate user correction tables Each list is stored as a file The name of the user correction file can be freely selected The file extension uco is assigned automatically and cannot be changed The files can be stored in a freely selectable directory and opened...

Page 738: ...hw CORRection DEXChange EXECute 728 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange MODE 728 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange SELect 729 SOURce hw CORRection CSET SELect 729 SOURce hw CORRection STATe 730 SOURce hw CORRection VALue 730 SOURce hw CORRection ZERoing STATe 730 SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog Requests a list of user correction tables The individual lists are separated by commas The lists are stored with ...

Page 739: ...RST 0 Example CORR CSET var user selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA FREQ POIN queries the number of frequency values in the table ucor1 Response 440 the table ucor1 contains 440 frequency values Usage Query only SOURce hw CORRection CSET DATA POWer Power Transfers the level data to the table selected with SOURce hw CORRection CSET SELect RST does not affect data lists The numerical suffix at S...

Page 740: ...e CORR CSET DATA SENS POW SONC fills the user correction list with level values acquired by the power sensor connector to the SENSOR connector Usage Event Manual operation See Fill User Correction Data with Sensor on page 239 SOURce CORRection CSET DELete Filename Deletes the specified table The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory a...

Page 741: ...AT queries the available files with extension txt Response ucor1 ucor2 the ASCII files ucor1 txt and ucor2 txt are available Usage Query only SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe EXTension Extension Selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Selection TXT text file or CSV Excel file is available Parameters Extension TXT CSV RST TXT Example MMEM CDIR var user import sel...

Page 742: ...lect ASCII Source Destination User Correction on page 237 SOURce hw CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn Column Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table Parameters Column TABulator SEMicolon COMMa SPACe RST COMMa Example CORR DEXC MODE EXP selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var user import_ucor csv s...

Page 743: ...s selected the ASCII file is imported as user correction list When export is selected the user correction list is exported into the selected ASCII file Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var user import_ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL ...

Page 744: ...files are stored or loaded in the specified directory Parameters Filename string Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXC AFIL SEL var user import_ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var user import_ucor_imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is import...

Page 745: ...OFF ON RST 0 Example SOUR CORR CSET var user ucor1 selects the table ucor1 SOUR CORR ON activates user correction Manual operation See State User Correction on page 233 SOURce hw CORRection VALue Queries the current value for user correction Return values Value float Range 100 to 100 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example CORR VAL queries the value currently used for level correction Response 3 the correcti...

Page 746: ...ernal DEViation 732 SOURce hw FM MODE 732 SOURce hw FM SENSitivity 733 SOURce hw FM SOURce 733 SOURce hw FM STATe 734 SOURce hw FM DEViation Deviation Sets the deviation of the frequency modulation signals in Hz The maximum deviation depends on the set RF frequency and the selected modulation mode see data sheet Parameters Deviation float Range 0 to dynamic Increment 0 01 RST 1000 Example FM 2E3 s...

Page 747: ...d SOURce hw FM DEViation Parameters Deviation float Range see data sheet Increment 0 01 RST 1000 Example FM EXT DEV 3kHz sets 3 kHz deviation to the frequency modulation signal Manual operation See FM Deviation on page 255 SOURce hw FM INTernal DEViation Deviation Sets the deviation of the internal frequency modulation signal in Hz The sum of the deviations of all active frequency modulation signa...

Page 748: ...s the input sensitivity of the externally applied signal for frequency modulation The returned value reports the sensitivity in Hz V It is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input signal The sensitivity depends on the set SOURce hw FM DEViation Return values Sensitivity float Range 0 to max Increment 0 01 Example FM DEV 5E3 sets a modulation deviation of 5 kHz FM SENS queries...

Page 749: ... 254 SOURce hw FM STATe State Activates frequency modulation Note Activation of FM deactivates phase modulation PM Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example FM STAT ON Activates FM modulation Manual operation See State on page 254 7 16 7 SOURce FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands used to define the frequency settings for the RF sources and sweeps SOURce hw FREQuency CENTer 735...

Page 750: ...e range is defined with the parameters SOURce hw FREQuency STARt and SOURce hw FREQuency STOP A defined offset and the multiplier factor affect the sweep frequency range and there fore all correlated parameters The set frequencies are only absolute values if the off set 0 and the multiplication factor 1 The multiplier multiplies the frequencies accordingly and the offset 0 shifts the frequencies c...

Page 751: ...Manual operation See Out State LO Coupling on page 219 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed Fixed Sets the frequency of the RF output signal In CW mode see FREQ MODE CW FIXed the instrument operates at a fixed fre quency In sweep mode FREQ MODE SWE the value applies to the sweep frequency and the instrument processes the frequency settings in defined sweep steps You can enter either a numerical frequency ...

Page 752: ...NCLude EXCLude INCLude Takes the frequency value of the loaded settings EXCLude Retains the current frequency when an instrument configuration is loaded RST INCLude Example FREQ RCL INCL takes the frequency from the loaded instrument configuration Manual operation See Exclude Frequency on page 163 SOURce hw FREQuency MANual Manual Determines the frequency and triggers a sweep step manually in SWE ...

Page 753: ...for the generating the RF output signal The selected mode determines the parameters to be used for further frequency settings Parameters Mode CW FIXed SWEep LIST CW FIXed Sets the fixed frequency mode CW and FIXed are synonyms The instrument operates at a defined frequency set with command SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed SWEep Sets the sweep mode The instrument processes the frequency settings in def...

Page 754: ...ample a mixer If you have specified an OFFSet and or a MULTiplier factor the actual frequency at the RF output does not change but rather the value queried with SOUR FREQ according to the following formula fFREQ fRFout fMULTiplier fOFFSet Parameters Offset float Increment 0 01 RST 0 Example FREQ OFFS 500kHz sets the frequency offset to 500 kHz Manual operation See Offset on page 211 SOURce hw FREQ...

Page 755: ...ltiplier factor affect the sweep range and therefore all correlated parameters The set frequencies are only absolute values if the offset 0 and the multiplication factor 1 The multiplier multiplies the frequencies accordingly and the offset 0 shifts the frequencies corresponding to the set value fSTARt fMULTiplier fOFFset fSTOP fMULTiplier fOFFset Parameters Start float Range full frequency range ...

Page 756: ...sweep to 2 GHz FREQ STAR 1 MHz sets the start frequency for the frequency sweep to 1 MHz Manual operation See Stop Freq Frequency Sweep on page 280 SOURce hw FREQuency STEP INCRement Increment Sets the step width for FREQ STEP MODE USER To adjust the frequency step by step with this step size use the FREQ UP and FREQ DOWN commands Note This value also applies to the step width of the rotary knob o...

Page 757: ...he commands for configuring the inputs for trigger data and control signals A common trigger threshold and input impedance is effective for all trigger and control signal inputs The settings influence the digital modulations the generation of waveforms or multicar rier signals and all digital standards Irrespective of this a common threshold and input impedance is effective for the serial and para...

Page 758: ...e INP MOD IMP HIGH sets 100 kOhm to ground Manual operation See Ext Impedance on page 253 SOURce INPut TRIGger BBANd SLOPe Slope Sets the active slope of an externally applied trigger signal at the TRIGGER connec tors The setting is effective for both connectors at the same time Parameters Slope NEGative POSitive RST POSitive Example INP TRIG BBAN SLOP NEG activates the falling slope of the extern...

Page 759: ... active or low inactive The command affects TRIGGER inputs CLOCK inputs Parameters Level float Range 0 01 to 2 Increment 0 01 RST 1 Default unit V Example INP TRIG LEV 1 V a high low threshold of 1 volt is set at all trigger and control sig nal inputs of the baseband section In the case of positive polar ity the signal is high active for a signal voltage of 1 volt and higher Manual operation See T...

Page 760: ...with number 1 Parameters Position integer Range 1 to 10 RST 1 Example see example for SOURce INPut DELay CLENgth ch on page 745 Manual operation See Automatic Delay Compensation on page 141 SOURce INPut DELay CLENgth ch CableLength Sets the total length of the cable used to connect the CLK OUT and CLK IN connec tors For the first slave in the chain the value represents the cable length between the...

Page 761: ...ent LEAKage Q 747 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe 747 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment STATe 748 SOURce hw IQ SOURce 748 SOURce hw IQ STATe 748 SOURce hw IQ SWAP STATe 748 SOURce hw IQ WBSTate 749 SOURce hw IQ CREStfactor CrestFactor Sets the crest factor of the external analog signal Parameters CrestFactor float Range 0 to 35 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit dB Example IQ CRES 10 specifies a cre...

Page 762: ...set I Q Mod on page 300 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment LEAKage Q Q Sets the carrier leakage amplitude for the Q channel of the I Q modulation Parameters Q float Range 10 to 10 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit PCT Example IQ IMP LEAK Q 3 PCT sets the leakage for the Q channel to 3 percent Manual operation See Offset I Q Mod on page 300 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe Angle Sets the quadrature of...

Page 763: ... modulator Selecting ANALog Wideband I Q In switches off SOURce AM STATe OFF SOURce BBAM STATe OFF SOURce BB DM STATe OFF SOURce BB Dig Standard STATe OFF Parameters Source BASeband ANALog DIFFerential Example IQ SOUR ANAL selects an external analog signal as the input signal The signal must be applied at the inputs I and Q Manual operation See IQ Source I Q Mod on page 299 SOURce hw IQ STATe Stat...

Page 764: ...required options see Chapter 5 7 3 2 Analog I Q Output on page 316 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS COUPling STATe 749 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS I 750 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS Q 750 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet I 750 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet Q 750 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog BIAS OPTimization RF STATe 750 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut LEVel 751 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog POWer PEP R...

Page 765: ...8 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet I I SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog OFFSet Q Q Valid only for output type Differential IQ OUTP ANAL TYPE DIFF Sets an offset between the inverting and non inverting output Parameters Q float Range 0 3 to 0 3 Increment 1E 4 RST 0 Example IQ OUTP ANAL TYPE DIFF the I Q signal components are output differential IQ OUTP ANAL OFFS Q 0 05 V sets an offset of 50 mV for the ...

Page 766: ...meters Level float Range 0 02 to 4 Increment 0 001 RST 1 Default unit V Example SOURce1 IQ OUTPut LEVel 2 sets a off load level of 2 V Manual operation See I Q Level Vp EMF on page 318 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog POWer PEP RESult Displays the resulting output off load voltage of both signal components at the rear panel Return values Result float Range 0 02 to 4 Increment 0 001 RST 1 Usage Query onl...

Page 767: ...POWer DATTenuation DAttenuation The level of the baseband and the RF signal is attenuated by this value Parameters DAttenuation float Range 3 522 to 80 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Example SOUR IQ OUTP ANAL MODE VATT SOUR IQ OUTP ANAL POW DATT 10dB The level of the baseband and RF signal is attenuated with 10dB Manual operation See Digital Attenuation on page 318 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut ANALog TYPE Type Selec...

Page 768: ...CRement 755 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIGital POWer STEP MODE 756 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut POWer VIA 756 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIGital SRATe 756 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIGital SRATe SOURce 757 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIGital STATe 757 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIGital CDEVice Queries the ID of a connected Rohde Schwarz instrument Return values CDevice string Example IQ OUTP DIG CDEV queries the connected device ID Usage Qu...

Page 769: ...rently clipped Return values State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example IQ OUTP DIG OFL STAT queries the overflow state Response 0 no overflow Usage Query only Manual operation See Overflow Digital I Q Out on page 322 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIGital PON Pon Selects the state which the digital I Q Output is to assume after the instrument is switched on Parameters Pon OFF UNCHanged RST OFF Example SOURce IQ OUTPut ...

Page 770: ...l output level to 10 dBFS Manual operation See Peak Level Digital I Q Out on page 321 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIGital POWer STEP INCRement Increment Sets the step width for the frequency setting if the frequency values UP DOWN are used and variation mode SOUR IQ OUTP DIG POW STEP MODE USER is selected The command is linked to Variation Step for manual operation i e the command also sets the step width...

Page 771: ... I Q Out on page 322 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut POWer VIA Via Activates the selected I Q output level entry fields of the currently selected signal path in the status bar Parameters Via PEP LEVel PEP The signal level is expressed in terms of a peak envelope power value PEP The level entry fields and the corresponding units are displayed in the status bar LEVel The signal level is expressed in terms of a ...

Page 772: ...T USER The internally generated clock reference signal is used The sample rate is calculated and displayed in the field Value DOUT An external clock reference signal is used The clock signal is directly fed in via pin CLK2 of the digital output interface option R S SMBV B18 Digital I Q Out The sample rate is displayed in the field Value RST USER Example IQ OUTP DIG SRAT SOUR USER the internally ge...

Page 773: ... SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MANual 759 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MODE 759 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency STARt 760 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency STOP 760 SOURce LFOutput STATe 761 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELl 761 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute 761 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency MODE 762 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts 762 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency R...

Page 774: ...lly in LFO SWE FREQ MODE MAN and LFO SWE FREQ MODE STEP Note You can select any frequency within the setting range The range is defined with LFO FREQ STARt and LFO FREQ STOP Parameters Manual float Range full frequency range Increment see the data sheet Modulation sources Internal modulation generator Resolution of frequency setting RST 1000 Example LFO SWE MODE MAN sets the Step sweep mode LFO FR...

Page 775: ...ts the sweep mode Manual operation See State on page 264 SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency STARt Start Sets the start frequency for the LF sweep Parameters Start float Range full frequency range Increment see the data sheet Resolution of frequency setting RST 1 KHz Example RST activates all presettings LFO SWE MODE AUTO TRIG0 SOUR SING LFO FREQ STAR 1 kHz LFO FREQ STOP 10 kHz LFO FREQ MODE SWE LFO SWE ...

Page 776: ...e LF Output State on page 262 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELl Dwell Sets the dwell time for each frequency step of the sweep Tip It is recommended to switch off the Display Update for optimum sweep perform ance especially with short dwell times SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF Parameters Dwell float Range see data sheet Dwell time setting range Increment 100E 6 RST 15E 3 Example LFO SWE DWEL 20 ...

Page 777: ...he rotary knob for switching to the next step With each step the frequency increases by the value specified with the command SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear or SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic respectively A frequency value entered with SOURce hw LFOutput FREQuency MANual takes no effect With manual control the frequency increases or decreases depending on the dir...

Page 778: ... LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing Parameters Points integer Range 2 max Example LFO FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 2 kHz LFO FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 20 kHz LFO SWE SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing LFO SWE POIN 11 sets 11 sweep steps for linear sweep spacing The sweep step width STEP is automatically set to 2 kHz SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency RETRace State Activates that ...

Page 779: ... frequency A subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency that menas the shape of the sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth TRIangle A sweep runs from the start to the stop frequency and back thatnt menas the shape of the sweep resembles a triangle A subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency RST SAWTooth Example SOUR LFO SWE SHAP TRI selects the sweep cycle with alternating ascending and desc...

Page 780: ... page 267 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear Linear Sets the step size for linear LF frequency sweep steps This parameter correlates with the number of steps SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts within the sweep range as follows fSTARt fSTOP freq_points fSTARt fSTOP step_lin 1 If you change the step size the number of steps changes accordingly The sweep range remains the same Para...

Page 781: ... log fSTARt log step_log 1 If you change the step size the number of steps changes accordingly The sweep range remains the same Parameters Logarithmic float Range 0 01 to 100 Increment 0 01 RST 1 Example LFO FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 1 kHz LFO FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 100 kHz LFO SWE SPAC LOG sets logarithmic sweep spacing LFO SWE STEP LOG 10PCT sets the step width for loga...

Page 782: ...he output impedance of the LF generator to 600 Ohms Manual operation See LF Source Impedance on page 263 SOURce LFOutput VOLTage Voltage Sets the voltage of the LF output signal Parameters Voltage float Range see the data sheet Internal modulation generator Output voltage range Increment see the data sheet resolution of output voltage set ting RST 1 Example LFO VOLT 2 V sets the voltage of the LF ...

Page 783: ...de determines the way in which the list is processed In the example the list is processed once only or repeatedly depending on the trigger setting SOUR1 LIST MODE AUTO 6 Determine the trigger In the example each trigger causes the list to be processed once from beginning to end SOUR LIST TRIG SOUR SING 7 Activate the List mode SOUR1 FREQ MODE LIST 8 Trigger the list depending on the mode SOUR1 LIS...

Page 784: ...y of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR Return values Catalog string Example MMEM CDIR var user Listmode selects the directory for the list mode files LIST CAT queries the available lists Response list1 list2 the lists list1 and list2 are available Usage Query only SOURce hw LIST DELete Filename Deletes the specified list The files a...

Page 785: ...le MMEM CDIR var user Listmode selects the directory for the list mode files FREQ MODE SWE deactivates the list mode for RF output and activates the sweep mode LIST DEL ALL deletes all list mode files in the selected directory Usage Event Manual operation See List Mode Data List Mode on page 292 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe CATalog Queries the available ASCII files for export or import of list m...

Page 786: ...nual operation See Extension List Mode on page 294 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SELect Filename Selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported Parameters Filename ascii_file_name Example LIST DEXC MODE IMP determines that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported into list mode lists LIST DEXC AFIL EXT TXT determines the extension txt for the query LIST DEXC AFIL CAT queri...

Page 787: ...s the decimal separator dot LIST DEXC SEL var user list_imp determines the source file list_imp for export into the ASCII file list csv LIST DEXC EXEC exports the list file data into the ASCII file Manual operation See Column Separator List Mode on page 294 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal Decimal Sets the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma wit...

Page 788: ...lists and ASCII files Parameters Mode IMPort EXPort RST IMPort Example LIST DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into list mode lists LIST DEXC AFIL SEL var user list csv selects that ASCII file list csv is imported LIST DEXC SEL var user list_imp selects that the ASCII file list csv is imported into list mode list list_imp Manual...

Page 789: ...SOURce hw LIST DWELl Dwell Sets the dwell time The R S SMBV generates the signal with the frequency power value pairs of each list entry for that particular period Parameters Dwell float Range 7E 4 to 100 Increment 1E 4 RST 15E 3 Example LIST DWEL 15 each setting in the list is retained for 15 ms Manual operation See Dwell Time List Mode on page 291 SOURce hw LIST FREE Queries on the free storage ...

Page 790: ...Hz 1 2GHz specifies the frequency values in list3 If the list already contains data it is overwritten Manual operation See Edit List Mode Data List Mode on page 292 SOURce hw LIST FREQuency POINts The command queries the length in points of the FREQuency component of the selected list Return values Points integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example LIST SEL var user list3 selects list3 for editing Th...

Page 791: ...he current list Only the values in the set index range LIST INDex STARt LIST INDex STOP are processed in List mode Parameters Start integer Range 0 to list length RST 0 Example LIST SEL var user list3 selects list3 for use in List mode LIST IND STAR 25 sets 25 as start index of the index range LIST IND STOP 49 sets 49 as stop index of the index range FREQ MODE LIST activates List mode The frequenc...

Page 792: ...the setting Usage Event Manual operation See Learn List Mode Data List Mode on page 291 SOURce hw LIST MODE Mode Selects how the list is to be processed similar to SOURce SWEep MODE Parameters Mode AUTO STEP AUTO Each trigger event triggers a complete list cycle Possible trigger settings for LIST TRIGger SOURce are AUTO SINGle and EXT STEP Each trigger event triggers only one step in the list proc...

Page 793: ...OW 0dBm 2dBm 2dBm 3dBm specifies the level values in list3 The number of level values must correspond to the number of frequency values The previ ous data is overwritten Manual operation See Edit List Mode Data List Mode on page 292 SOURce hw LIST POWer POINts Queries the length in points of the LEVel part of the selected list Return values Points integer Range 0 to INT_MAX RST 0 Example LIST SEL ...

Page 794: ...ar user list3 selects list3 for editing Manual operation See List Mode Data List Mode on page 292 SOURce hw LIST TRIGger EXECute Starts the processing of a list in list mode It corresponds to the manual control com mand Execute Single Example SOUR LIST TRIG EXEC triggers the processing of the selected list Usage Event Manual operation See Execute Single List Mode on page 290 SOURce hw LIST TRIGger...

Page 795: ...e external trigger Manual operation See Mode List Mode on page 290 7 16 13 SOURce MODulation Subsystem This subsystem contains the command for switching on off all modulations SOURce hw MODulation ALL STATe State Activates deactivates the modulations The command SOUR MOD ALL STAT OFF switches all modulations off A subsequent command SOUR MOD ALL STAT ON restores the status that was active before t...

Page 796: ...ctor are automatically activated in addition PGEN STAT OFF deactivates the output of the pulse signal by the pulse generator at the PULSE VIDEO connector The pulse modulation of the RF carrier must be activated with command SOURce PULM STATe Options R S SMBV K23 Manual operation See Video Sync Signal State Pulse Generator on page 270 7 16 15 SOURce PHASe Subsystem This subsystem contains the comma...

Page 797: ... For information on the required options see Chapter 5 5 12 4 Phase Modulation PhiM on page 256 SOURce hw PM DEViation 782 SOURce hw PM EXTernal COUPling 782 SOURce hw PM EXTernal DEViation 783 SOURce hw PM INTernal DEViation 783 SOURce hw PM MODE 784 SOURce hw PM SENSitivity 784 SOURce hw PM SOURce 784 SOURce hw PM STATe 785 SOURce hw PM DEViation Deviation Sets the deviation of the phase modulat...

Page 798: ...et The sum of the deviations of all active frequency modulation signals may not exceed the total value set with command SOURce hw PM EXTernal DEViation Parameters Deviation float Range 0 to 20 RST 1 Example PM 5 sets 5 RAD deviation for the external phase modulation signal Manual operation See ɸM Deviation on page 258 SOURce hw PM INTernal DEViation Deviation Sets the deviation of the internal pha...

Page 799: ...on Manual operation See ɸM Mode on page 258 SOURce hw PM SENSitivity Queries the input sensitivity of the externally applied signal for phase modulation The returned value reports the sensitivity in RAD V It is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input Return values Sensitivity float Example PM DEV 1 sets a modulation deviation of 1RAD PM SENS queries the input sensitivity at ...

Page 800: ...tion FM Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example PM STAT ON activates PM Manual operation See State on page 257 7 16 17 SOURce POWer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the output level level control and level correction of the RF signal Other units can also be used instead of dBm by entering the unit directly after the numerical value example POW 0 5V by changing the DEFau...

Page 801: ...is deactivated ALC Off Parameters OffMode SHOLd TABLe HIGHaccuracy SHOLd Level control is activated briefly if the level or frequency changes ALC Off Sample Hold HIGHaccuracy The ALC mode High Accuracy ensures improved level accuracy Note This mode increases the frequency and level setting time up to 20 ms TABLe Internal level control is performed according to the ALC table RST SHOLd Example POW A...

Page 802: ...s mode increases the frequency and level setting time up to 20 ms RST AUTO Manual operation See State ALC on page 227 SOURce hw POWer ATTenuation RFOFf MODE Mode Selects the attenuator mode when the RF signal is switched off Parameters Mode UNCHanged FATTenuation UNCHanged Freezes the setting of the attenuator when RF is switched off The attenuator is only activated when RF is switched on This set...

Page 803: ...u can increase or decrease the values step by step with the UP and DOWN according to the step width defined with SOURce hw POWer STEP INCRement The RF output is activated with OUTPut hw STATe on page 578 RF ON RF OFF Parameters Amplitude Minimum level Maximum level Determines the RF output level Range Minimum level to Maximum level RST 30 Example The keywords of this command are largely optional T...

Page 804: ...e OFFSet 10 or POW OFFS 10 sets the RF level offset to 10 dB Manual operation See Offset Level on page 223 SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate RCL Rcl Determines whether the RF level is retained or taken from a loaded instrument configu ration when you recall instrument settings with the command RCL Parameters Rcl INCLude EXCLude INCLude Takes the level value of the loaded settings EXCLude Retains the...

Page 805: ...very pure sinewave signal is output RST NORMal Example POW LMODE LOWD sets the LOWDistortion mode The instrument reduces distor tions of the RF signal to a minimum Manual operation See RF Mode on page 222 SOURce hw POWer MANual Manual In Sweep mode SOUR POW MODE SWE the command sets the level for the next sweep step in the Step sweep mode SOUR SWE POW MODE MAN Here only level values between the se...

Page 806: ...t sweep step with a level of 5 5 dBm Manual operation See Current Level Level Sweep on page 286 SOURce hw POWer MODE Mode Sets the instrument operating mode and therefore also the commands used to set the output level Parameters Mode CW FIXed SWEep CW FIXed Operates at a constant level CW and FIXed are synonyms To set the output level value use the command SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude...

Page 807: ...and corresponds to the level at the RF output i e any offset entry is not taken into consideration Note The SCPI command SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude sets the level of the Level display i e the level containing offset Parameters Power Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet Increm...

Page 808: ...Range 0 to 1000 RST 0 Example POW SPC DEL 2 ms the sensor starts the next reading 2 ms after the level adjust ment Manual operation See Delay Time on page 232 SOURce hw POWer SPC PEAK PowCntrlPeak Activates power control by means of the peak power values provided the power sen sor supports this function Parameters PowCntrlPeak 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example POW SPC PEAK ON uses the measured peak power f...

Page 809: ...SPC TARGet PowCntrlTarget Sets the nominal level expected at the input of the sensor To define the unit of the power value use command SENSe ch UNIT POWer on page 588 Parameters PowCntrlTarget float Range 50 to 30 Increment 0 01 RST 10 Example SENS UNIT dBm selects unit dBm for setting the target level value POW SPC TARG 10 sets 10 dBm target level Manual operation See Target Level on page 231 SOU...

Page 810: ...s to the step width of the rotary knob of the instrument and increases or decreases the level accordingly when you work in user defined step mode Parameters Increment float Range full specified level range Increment see the data sheet Level sweep Step size setting resolution RST 1 Example POW STEP 2 sets the step width for entering the RF level to 2 dB Manual operation See Variation Step on page 2...

Page 811: ...the sweep setting range Range full specified level range Increment see the data sheet Level sweep Step size setting resolution RST 10 Example POW STOP 3 sets the stop level for the level sweep to 3 dBm for RF output A Manual operation See Stop Level Level Sweep on page 286 7 16 18 SOURce PULM Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the pulse modulation The LF generator is used a...

Page 812: ...ly configure the pulse modulation settings for external modulation source Select the external modulation source SOURce PULM SOURce EXT Set the polarity of the externally applied modulation signal SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal Select the impedance for the external pulse modulation trigger input SOURce PULM TRIGger EXTernal IMPedance G10K Configure the pulse generator settings Set pulse period SOURce ...

Page 813: ...Rce hw PULM WIDTh 803 SOURce hw PULM DELay Delay Sets the pulse delay Parameters Delay float Range 0 to 100 s Increment 10 ns RST 10 ns Example PULM DEL 13 us 13 us elapse after a trigger before the first pulse is generated Options R S R S SMBV K23 Pulse Generator Manual operation See Pulse Delay Pulse Generator on page 271 SOURce hw PULM DOUBle DELay Delay Sets the delay from the start of the fir...

Page 814: ... ns RST 3 us Example PULM DOUB WIDT 33 us sets a width of 33 us for the second pulse Options R S SMBV K23 Pulse Generator Manual operation See Double Pulse Width Pulse Generator on page 271 SOURce hw PULM MODE Mode Sets the mode of the pulse generator Parameters Mode SINGle DOUBle SINGle Enables single pulse generation DOUBle Enables double pulse generation The two pulses are generated in one puls...

Page 815: ...riod Sets the period of the generated pulse The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal Parameters Period float Range 5 us 20 ns to 100 s Increment 1us 5 ns RST 10 us Example PULM PER 220 us the pulse period is 220 us Options R S SMBV K23 Pulse Generator Manual operation See Pulse Period Pulse Generator on page 270 SOURce hw PULM POLarity Polarity Sets the polarity betwee...

Page 816: ... externally via the EXT MOD connector is used for the pulse modulation RST INTernal Example PULM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source PULM STAT ON activates the pulse modulation Usage SCPI confirmed Options R S SMBV K22 Pulse Modulator Manual operation See Source on page 261 SOURce hw PULM STATe State Activates the pulse modulation Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example PULM STAT ON ...

Page 817: ... 50 Ohm as the trigger impedance for the external pulse trigger Options R S SMBV K22 Pulse Modulator Manual operation See External Impedance on page 275 SOURce hw PULM TRIGger EXTernal SLOPe Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied trigger at the PULSE EXT connector Parameters Slope NEGative POSitive RST POSitive Example PULM TRIG EXT SLOP NEG The pulse generator is triggered on t...

Page 818: ...e width of the generated pulse The width determines the pulse length The pulse width must be at least 20ns less than the set pulse period Parameters Width float Range 10 ns to 100 s Increment 10 ns RST 2 us Example PULM WIDT 33 us sets a width of 33 us for the pulse Options R S SMBV K23 Pulse Generator Manual operation See Pulse Width Pulse Generator on page 271 7 16 19 SOURce ROSCillator Subsyste...

Page 819: ...ency Manual operation See External Reference Frequency on page 216 SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal RFOFf STATe State Activates that RF output is automatically switched off when in external source mode no reference signal is supplied This setting ensures that no improper RF signal due to the missing external reference signal is output and used for measurements In addition to the error message Ext Ref m...

Page 820: ...e Value Specifies the frequency correction value adjustment value Parameters Value integer Range 0 to maximum value see data sheet Increment see data sheet RST Example ROSC ADJ VAL 456 Sets the adjustment value to 456 Manual operation See Adjustment DAC Value on page 217 SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe State Determines whether the calibrated OFF or a user defined ON adjustment value is us...

Page 821: ...of the frequency of the external refer ence signal with the command SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency RST n a factory preset INTernal Example ROSC SOUR EXT Selects the external source ROSC EXT FREQ 5 MHz Informs the instrument that the external reference has a fre quency of 5 MHz Manual operation See Source on page 216 7 16 20 SOURce SWEep Subsystem The SOURce subsystem contains the commands f...

Page 822: ...ce hw SWEep FREQuency DWELl 807 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency EXECute 808 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency MODE 808 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency POINts 809 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency RETRace 810 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency RUNNing 810 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency SHAPe 810 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency SPACing 811 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 811 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 812 SOURce hw SWEep POW...

Page 823: ...sets a dwell time of 12 ms for a frequency sweep at the RF out put Manual operation See Dwell Time Frequency Sweep on page 282 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency EXECute Starts an RF frequency sweep cycle manually The command is only effective in single mode Example TRIG FSW SOUR SING SOUR SWE FREQ MODE AUT SWE FREQ EXEC triggers a frequency sweep at the RF output Usage Event Manual operation See Execute S...

Page 824: ...equency increases by the value entered under SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN linear spacing or STEP LOG logarithmic spacing RST AUTO Example SWE MODE AUTO selects Mode Auto for a frequency sweep at the RF output Manual operation See Mode RF Frequency Sweep on page 277 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency POINts Points Determines the number of steps for the RF frequency sweep within the sweep range This parameter alwa...

Page 825: ...le this feature when you are working with sawtooth shapes in sweep mode Single or External Single Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example TRIG0 SWE SOUR SING FREQ MODE SWE SWE SHAP SAWT SWE RETR ON activates retrace function i e the frequency changes to the value at start frequency while waiting for the next trigger event Manual operation See Retrace RF Frequency Sweep on page 281 SOURce hw SWEe...

Page 826: ...ervals The frequency increases or decreases by this value at each step The keyword FREQuency can be omitted Then the command is SCPI compliant Parameters Spacing LINear LOGarithmic LINear With the linear sweep the step width is a fixed frequency value which is added to the current frequency The step width for lin ear sweep is entered in Hz see SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear on page 811 LOGa...

Page 827: ...tep width for linear sweep spacing to 2 MHz RF sweep at the RF output The number of sweep steps for linear sweep spacing POINts is automatically set to 2001 Manual operation See Step Lin Log Frequency Sweep on page 281 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic Logarithmic Sets a logarithmically determined sweep step size for the RF frequency sweep It is expressed in percent and you must enter the...

Page 828: ...ATe Dattstate Activates digital attenuation during RF power sweep Parameters Dattstate 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example SWE POW DATT STAT ON switches on digital attenuation Manual operation See Use Digital Attenuation on page 286 SOURce hw SWEep POWer DWELl Dwell Sets the time taken for each level step of the sweep Tip It is recommended to switch off the Display Update for optimum sweep perform ance espec...

Page 829: ...ry encoder by the value specified under SOUR SWE POW STEP With remote control the level increases by the value specified under SWEep POW STEP which each sent POW MAN command irrespective the value entered there STEP Each trigger triggers one sweep step only The level increases by the value entered under SWEep POWer STEP RST AUTO Example SWE POW MODE AUTO selects Mode Auto for a level sweep at RF o...

Page 830: ...is feature when you are working with sawtooth shapes in sweep mode Single or External Single Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Example TRIG0 SWE SOUR SING POW MODE SWE SWE POW SHAP SAWT SWE POW RETR ON activates retrace function i e the level changes to the value at start level while waiting for the next trigger event Manual operation See Retrace RF Level Sweep on page 287 SOURce hw SWEep POWer RU...

Page 831: ... the sweep spacing mode The sweep spacing for level sweeps is always lin ear Return values Mode LINear RST LINear Example SWE POW SPAC MODE queries the sweep spacing for a level sweep at RF output Result LIN linear spacing Usage Query only SOURce hw SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic Logarithmic Sets a logarithmically determined sweep step size for the RF level sweep It is expressed in decibels and you ...

Page 832: ...s the commands for the status reporting system See also Chap ter 6 5 Status Reporting System on page 494 for detailed information RST on page 507 has no effect on the status registers Value ranges Queries return the current value of the respective register which permits a check of the device status Return values A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 215 1 The configuration commands set the respe...

Page 833: ... forwarded to the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request Parameters Enable string Example STAT OPER ENAB 32767 all events are forwarded to the sum bit of the status byte STATus OPERation EVENt Event Queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readou...

Page 834: ...all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle parts of STATus OPERa tion and STATus QUEStionable are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Parameters Preset string Example STAT PRES resets the status registers STATus QUEStionable CONDition Condition Queries the content of...

Page 835: ...s Questionable Event register STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Ntransition Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register Parameters Ntransition string Example STAT QUES NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the STA Tus QUEStionable...

Page 836: ...nal generation SYSTem ERRor ALL 822 SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL 823 SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT 823 SYSTem ERRor COUNt 824 SYSTem ERRor NEXT 824 SYSTem ERRor HISTory 824 SYSTem ERRor HISTory CLEar 825 SYSTem ERRor STATic 825 SYSTem HELP EXPort 825 SYSTem DLOCk 826 SYSTem KLOCk 826 SYSTem ULOCk 826 SYSTem RCL 827 SYSTem SAV 827 SYSTem SECurity VOLMode STATe 827 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator 828 SYSTem C...

Page 837: ...Tem LANGuage 835 SYSTem PRESet 836 SYSTem PROTect ch STATe 836 SYSTem REBoot 836 SYSTem RESTart 836 SYSTem SHUTdown 837 SYSTem STARtup COMPlete 837 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate 837 SYSTem DATE 837 SYSTem TIME 838 SYSTem TIME ZONE 838 SYSTem TIME ZONE CATalog 838 SYSTem VERSion 839 SYSTem OSYStem 839 SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER 839 SYSTem WAIT 839 SYSTem ERRor ALL Queries the error event queue for all unread...

Page 838: ...rror numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI Example SYST ERR CODE ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT Queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Only the error number is returned and not the entire error text Return values Next string 0 No error i e ...

Page 839: ...s it from the queue The response consists of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Return values Next string Error event_number Error event_description Device depend ent info If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Example SYST ERR queries the oldest entry in the error q...

Page 840: ...eue Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor HISTory CLEar Clears the error history Example SYSTem ERRor HISTory ClEar Deletes the history entries Usage Event SYSTem ERRor STATic Returns a list of all errors existing at the time when the query is started This list corre sponds to the display on the info page under manual control Return values StaticErrors string Example SYSTem ERRor STATic 221 Settings confl...

Page 841: ...eyboard of the instrument including the LOCAL key Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST n a factory preset 0 Example SYST KLOC ON Locks the front panel and external controls To enable the con trols set SYST KLOC OFF Manual operation See User Interface on page 151 SYSTem ULOCk Mode Locks or unlocks the user interface of the instrument Parameters Mode ENABled DONLy DISabled VNConly ENABled Unlocks the dis...

Page 842: ...ile with defined filename Setting parameters Pathname string Example SYSTem SAV var user Instrument_settings svrcltxt Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save on page 162 SYSTem SECurity VOLMode STATe SecPassWord MmemProtState Activates volatile mode so that no user data can be written to the internal memory per manently To enable volatile mode reboot the instrument Otherwise the change has no...

Page 843: ...out EOI RST n a factory preset STANdard Example SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator EOI Only a character which is sent simultaneously with the line mes sage EOI is accepted as the terminator SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess Address Sets the GPIB address Parameters Address integer Range 0 to 30 RST n a factory preset 28 Example SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 28 Sets GPIB address Manual op...

Page 844: ...137 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon WORKgroup Workgroup Sets the individual workgroup name of the instrument Parameters Workgroup string Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon WORKgroup TEST_09 sets the workgroup name Manual operation See Workgroup on page 138 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress DNS DNS Determines the net DNS server to resolve the name Parameters DNS string Example SYST COMM...

Page 845: ...Range 0 0 0 0 to ff ff ff ff Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway 1 2 3 4 sets the IP address of the default gateway Manual operation See Default Gateway on page 139 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK Mask Sets the subnet mask Parameters Mask string Example SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK 255 255 0 0 determines the subnet mask Manual operation See Sub...

Page 846: ...ate GPIB RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the GPIB interface To change the GPIB address use the command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess Return values Resource string Example SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RESource queries the VISA resource string Response GPIB 28 INSTR Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 144 SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork R...

Page 847: ...te USB RESource queries the VISA resource string for remote control via the USB interface Response USB 72 000000 INSTR Usage Query only Manual operation See Visa Resource Strings on page 144 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource Queries the visa resource string for the serial remote control interface This string is used for remote control of the instrument Return values Resource string Example SYSTem...

Page 848: ... serial remote control interface Parameters SBits 1 2 RST n a factory preset 1 Example SYST COMM SER SBIT 2 Selects 2 stop bits Manual operation See Stop Bits on page 144 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource Queries the visa resource string for remote control via LAN interface using TCP IP socket protocol Return values Resource string Example SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource Response TCPIP 10 113 ...

Page 849: ...les the selection of user definable IDN and OPT strings RST n a factory preset AUTO Example SYST IDEN USER Selects the user defined identification string Manual operation See Mode on page 145 SYSTem IDENtification PRESet Sets the IDN and OPT strings in user defined mode to default values Example SYSTem IDENtification USER SYSTem IDENtification PRESet Usage Event Manual operation See Set to default...

Page 850: ...est option Manual operation See OPT String on page 146 SYSTem LANGuage Language Sets the remote control command set The instrument can also be remote controlled via the command set of several other generators for example HP generator See the Application Note 1GP71 at the down load area of the product site on the Internet Note While working in a emulation mode the instrument s specific command set ...

Page 851: ... also Chapter 5 2 3 17 Protection on page 146 Parameters State select RST n a factory preset 1 Setting parameters Key integer The respective functions are disabled when the protection level is activated No password is required for activation of a level A password must be entered to deactivate the protection level The password for the first level is 123456 Example to activate protection level SYSTe...

Page 852: ...switchover from remote control to manual control always sets the status of the update of the display to ON Parameters Update 0 1 OFF ON RST ON Example SYST DISP UPD OFF switches update of displayed parameter values off Manual operation See Display Update is On Off on page 132 SYSTem DATE Year Month Day Queries or sets the date for the instrument internal calendar This parameter is protected in ord...

Page 853: ...PROTect ch STATe on page 836 Parameters Hour 0 23 0 59 0 59 Range 0 to 23 Minute integer Range 0 to 59 Second integer Range 0 to 59 Example SYSTem TIME Response 12 0 0 it is precisely 12 pm Manual operation See Time on page 136 SYSTem TIME ZONE TimeZone Sets the time zone You can query the list of the available time zones with SYSTem TIME ZONE CATalog Parameters TimeZone string Manual operation Se...

Page 854: ...em Response Linux Usage Query only SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER Queries the user directory that means the directory the instrument stores user files on Return values PathUser string Example SYSTem MMEMory PATH USER Response var user Usage Query only SYSTem WAIT TimeMs Delays the execution of the subsequent remote command by the specified time This function is useful for example to execute an SCPI sequ...

Page 855: ...ssed The command is intended for servicing purpo ses and should be used only by the Rohde Schwarz service personnel TEST hw ALL STARt 840 TEST hw ALL RESult 840 TEST EIQMode 841 TEST hw DIRect 841 TEST BB DATA ERRor RATE 841 TEST BB DATA FREQuency 841 TEST BB DATA OFFTime 842 TEST BB DATA ONTime 842 TEST BB DATA RDELay 842 TEST BB DATA STATe 842 TEST BB DATA TRIGger MODE 842 TEST BB DATA TYPE 843 ...

Page 856: ...DIRect HW_assembly subadress hex data string TEST hw DIRect HW_assembly subadress The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the command any safety mechanisms are bypassed This function is only available via remote control Example TEST DIR SSYN 0 H12345678 TEST DIR SSYN 0 Response H12345678 TEST BB DATA ERRor RATE ErrorRate Sets the error bit pattern of the BER BLER test generator Param...

Page 857: ...ay RestartDelay Sets the delay time for the restart signal of the BER BLER test generator Parameters RestartDelay integer Range 0 to 4294967295 RST 1000 Manual operation See Restart Delay on page 206 TEST BB DATA STATe State Activates the test generator for the bit error rate measurement or the block error rate measurement respectively Parameters State 0 1 OFF ON RST 0 Manual operation See State o...

Page 858: ...CONTinuous ON were set Under TRIGger several sweep subsystems exist Other commands associated with the trigger system of the R S SMBV can be found in the modulation and RF signal subsystems TRIGger hw Suffix TRIGger 1 2 is not permitted TRIGger0 activates the LF output Table 7 3 Cross reference between the manual and remote control R S name SCPI name Command under manual con trol AUTO IMMediate Au...

Page 859: ...is started SINGle BUS One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the GPIB commands SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency EXECute TRIGger hw FSWeep IMMediate or TRG The mode has to be set to AUTO SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector EAUTo The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep...

Page 860: ...Sweep on page 266 Immediately starts an LF frequency sweep The command is effective in sweep mode Single LFO SWE MODE AUTO in combina tion with TRIG LFFS SOUR SING TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce Source Sets the trigger source for the LF sweep The trigger is triggered by the com mand SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under ma...

Page 861: ...ed A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency and so on RST AUTO Example TRIG LFFS SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger TRIGger hw LFFSweep IMMediate Immediately starts an LF frequency sweep The command is effective in sweep mode Single LFO SWE MODE AUTO in combina tion with TRIG LFFS SOUR SING Usa...

Page 862: ...r event stops the sweep at the current frequency a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency and so on RST AUTO Example TRIG PSW SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger Manual operation See Mode Level Sweep on page 283 TRIGger hw PSWeep IMMediate Immediately starts an RF level sweep The command is only effective for sweep mode Single SOURce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO in...

Page 863: ...ODE is set to STEP one step is executed The mode has to be set to AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector EAUTo The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency and...

Page 864: ...eep on page 266 7 21 UNIT Subsystem The UNIT subsystem contains the commands specifying which units are valid if no unit is indicated in a command These settings are valid for the entire instrument UNIT ANGLe Angle Defines the default unit for the phase modulation angle It is not valid for commands which determine angle values e g RF phase It does not influence the manual control parameter unit an...

Page 865: ...uring shipment Insufficient protection against mechanical and electrostatic effects during shipment can damage the instrument When shipping an instrument use the original packaging If you do not have the original packaging use sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from moving around inside the box Pack the instrument in antistatic wrap to protect it from electrostatic charging Secure the in...

Page 866: ...oth 2 Check and clean the fans regularly to ensure that they always operate properly 3 Clean the touchscreen as follows a Apply a small amount of standard screen cleaner to a soft cloth b Wipe the screen gently with the moist but not wet cloth c If necessary remove any excess moisture with a dry soft cloth 8 2 Storing and Packing The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data...

Page 867: ... with the command SYSTem ERRor If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The status reporting system is descri bed in detail in Chapter 6 5 Status Reporting System on page 494 Section Chapter 9 5 Resolving Network Connection Failures on page 858 pro vides recommended solutions for network connection errors and helps you to collect the information required for quick and efficient support 9...

Page 868: ... pro tection is tripped and the connection between the RF output and attenuator is interrup ted The overload protection is reset by pressing the RF ON OFF key The RF input is activated when the overload protection is reset LEVEL OFFSET A level offset is set The level entered and displayed in the Level field takes the offset of any downstream attenuators amplifiers into consideration by way of calc...

Page 869: ...nly mode To return to manual operation or to REMOTE state use one of the following com mands LOCS swichtes directly from REM LLO to manual operation REMS changes the remote control state from REM LLO to REMOTE CALL IBLOC generator Visual Basic command switches from remote control state to manual operation LOC LLO For the direct operation the state has been changed from remote control to manual ope...

Page 870: ...orrection is active The level is corrected by the given values in the selected user correction list Correc tion is performed by the user defined list values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency With frequencies which are not contained in the list the level correction is determined by interpolation of the closest correction values OvenCold The reference oscillator has not...

Page 871: ...is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history SCPI command SYSTem ERRor STATic 9 3 SCPI Error Messages The SCPI error messages are the same in all SCPI instruments Detailed information and an overview of all error messages as defined in SCPI standard can be fo...

Page 872: ...ve to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loa ded into the instrument 183 Adjustment data inva lid Adjustment data are invalid and must be restored The adjustment data have to be generated again by an internal or external adjustment or to be loa ded into the instrument 200 Cannot access hard ware The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful The module is not ins...

Page 873: ...has to be entered when creating a new list 464 Invalid filename exten sion The file extension is not valid for the required operation Check the file extension For instance the file extension for waveform list files is wv It is not possible to enter another file extension when storing a list 465 File contains invalid data The selected file contains data that is not valid for the file type The file ...

Page 874: ... is within the network s address range See IP Address on page 138 Check whether IP addresses that were set manually or obtained via the Zeroconf APIPA protocol are valid 9 6 Obtaining Technical Support If you encounter problems that you cannot solve yourself contact your Rohde Schwarz support center as listed at http www customersupport rohde schwarz com Our support center staff is optimally train...

Page 875: ...ur region as listed on the Internet http www customersupport rohde schwarz com To remove sensitive data For information on how to handle or remove the sensitive data from your instru ment refer to the description Resolving Security Issues when working with R S SMBV Packing and transporting the instrument If the instrument has to be transported or shipped observe the notes described in Chapter 2 3 ...

Page 876: ...o the data sheet A 1 GPIB Bus Interface Pin assignment Figure A 1 Pin assignment of GPIB bus interface Bus lines Data bus with 8 lines D0 to D7 The transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in the ASCII ISO code D0 is the least significant bit D7 the most significant bit Control bus with five lines IFC Interface Clear active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connec ted to the default...

Page 877: ...nt connected is accepting the data on the data bus Interface Functions Instruments which can be controlled via GPIB bus can be equipped with different inter face functions The interface function for the R S SMBV are listed in the following table Table A 1 GPIB bus interface functions Control character Interface function SH1 Handshake source function source handshake full capability AH1 Handshake s...

Page 878: ... BLER SETup CLOCk POLarity 537 BLER SETup CORDer 537 BLER SETup DATA CONNector 538 BLER SETup DATA POLarity 538 BLER SETup DENable 539 BLER SETup MCOunt 540 BLER SETup MERRor 540 BLER SETup TIMeout 542 BLER SETup TYPE 541 BLER STARt 542 BLER STATe 542 BLER STOP 543 BLER UNIT 543 CALibration ALL MEASure 545 CALibration DATA FACTory DATE 546 CALibration ROSCillator DATA 548 CALibration hw BBIN MEASu...

Page 879: ...FILE NAME 558 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO DIRectory CLEar 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO STATe 561 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO 558 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE DAY STATe 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE MONTh STATe 559 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE NUMBer 560 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE PREFix 560 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE PREFix STATe 560 HCOPy FILE NAME AUTO FILE...

Page 880: ...SPlay PERManent STATe 582 SENSe ch POWer FILTer LENGth AUTO 582 SENSe ch POWer FILTer LENGth USER 583 SENSe ch POWer FILTer NSRatio 583 SENSe ch POWer FILTer NSRatio MTIMe 583 SENSe ch POWer FILTer SONCe 584 SENSe ch POWer FILTer TYPE 584 SENSe ch POWer FREQuency 585 SENSe ch POWer LOGGing STATe 585 SENSe ch POWer OFFSet 586 SENSe ch POWer OFFSet STATe 586 SENSe ch POWer SOURce 587 SENSe ch POWer ...

Page 881: ...MMunicate SERial PARity 833 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RESource 832 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs 833 SYSTem COMMunicate SOCKet RESource 833 SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource 832 SYSTem DATE 837 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate 837 SYSTem DLOCk 826 SYSTem ERRor ALL 822 SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL 823 SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT 823 SYSTem ERRor COUNt 824 SYSTem ERRor HISTory CLEar 825 SYSTem ERRor HISTory 824 SYSTem ERR...

Page 882: ...844 TRIGger hw LFFSweep 845 TRIGger hw LFFSweep IMMediate 846 TRIGger hw LFFSweep SOURce 845 TRIGger hw PSWeep SOURce 846 TRIGger hw PSWeep IMMediate 847 TRIGger hw IMMediate 849 TRIGger hw SWEep SOURce 847 TRIGger hw SWEep IMMediate 848 UNIT ANGLe 849 UNIT POWer 849 SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog 723 SOURce CORRection CSET DELete 725 SOURce INPut BERT IMPedance 543 SOURce INPut BERT THReshold 544...

Page 883: ...Wer CARRier 596 SOURce hw AWGN POWer MODE 596 SOURce hw AWGN POWer NOISe 597 SOURce hw AWGN POWer NOISe TOTal 597 SOURce hw AWGN POWer RMODe 598 SOURce hw AWGN POWer SUM PEP 599 SOURce hw AWGN POWer SUM 598 SOURce hw AWGN STATe 599 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk 602 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk MODE 602 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk MULTiplier 602 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary CLOCk SOURce 603 SOURce hw BB ...

Page 884: ...er SETTing CATalog 631 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SETTing LOAD 631 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SETTing STORe 631 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier SETTing STORe FAST 632 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier TIME 632 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary MCARrier TIME MODE 632 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary PRESet 601 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary STATe 601 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary TRIGger ARM EXECute 605 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary...

Page 885: ... FREE 636 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform POINts 636 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform SELect 637 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WAVeform TAG 637 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CLOad 638 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure BLANk APPend 639 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CATalog 640 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk 640 SOURce hw BB ARBitrary WSEGment CONFigure CLOCk MODE 640 ...

Page 886: ...DLISt SELect 681 SOURce hw BB DM DLISt TAG 676 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer OSAMpling 664 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer OSAMpling AUTO 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter APCO25 665 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter APCO25Lsm GAUSs 666 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter APCO25Lsm LOWPass 666 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter COSine BANDwidth 666 SOURce hw BB DM FILTer PARameter COSine ROLLoff 665 SOURce hw BB DM ...

Page 887: ...ISt DELete 685 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt LOAD 686 SOURce hw BB DM STANdard ULISt STORe 686 SOURce hw BB DM STATe 651 SOURce hw BB DM SWITching SOURce 651 SOURce hw BB DM SWITching STATe 652 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger ARM EXECute 655 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger DELay UNIT 659 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXECute 655 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger EXTernal SYNChronize OUTPut 655 SOURce hw BB DM TRIGger OUTPut DEL...

Page 888: ...ce hw BB MCCW CARRier PHASe 696 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier POWer 697 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier SPACing 697 SOURce hw BB MCCW CARRier STATe 698 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor 698 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor ACTual 698 SOURce hw BB MCCW CFACtor MODE 699 SOURce hw BB MCCW CLOCk MODE 713 SOURce hw BB MCCW CLOCk MULTiplier 713 SOURce hw BB MCCW CLOCk SOURce 714 SOURce hw BB MCCW CLOCk SYNChronization EXECute 7...

Page 889: ...M FILTer 716 SOURce hw BB PROGress MCODer 716 SOURce hw BBIN ALEVel EXECute 717 SOURce hw BBIN CDEVice 717 SOURce hw BBIN CFACtor 717 SOURce hw BBIN DIGital ASETting STATe 718 SOURce hw BBIN FOFFset 718 SOURce hw BBIN IQSWap STATe 718 SOURce hw BBIN MPERiod 719 SOURce hw BBIN OLOad HOLD RESet 719 SOURce hw BBIN OLOad HOLD STATe 719 SOURce hw BBIN OLOad STATe 720 SOURce hw BBIN POWer PEAK 720 SOURc...

Page 890: ...Rement 741 SOURce hw FREQuency STOP 740 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed 736 SOURce hw FREQuency CW FIXed RCL 737 SOURce hw INPut MODext IMPedance 743 SOURce hw IQ CREStfactor 746 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment IQRatio MAGNitude 746 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment LEAKage I 747 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment LEAKage Q 747 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment QUADrature ANGLe 747 SOURce hw IQ IMPairment STATe 748 SOURce hw IQ OUTPut DIG...

Page 891: ...SHAPe 764 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing 764 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 766 SOURce hw LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 765 SOURce hw LIST CATalog 769 SOURce hw LIST DELete 769 SOURce hw LIST DELete ALL 770 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe CATalog 770 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe EXTension 771 SOURce hw LIST DEXChange AFILe SELect 771 SOURce hw LIST DEXChang...

Page 892: ...SOURce hw POWer SPC CRANge 792 SOURce hw POWer SPC DELay 793 SOURce hw POWer SPC PEAK 793 SOURce hw POWer SPC SELect 793 SOURce hw POWer SPC STATe 794 SOURce hw POWer SPC TARGet 794 SOURce hw POWer STARt 794 SOURce hw POWer STEP MODE 795 SOURce hw POWer STEP INCRement 795 SOURce hw POWer STOP 796 SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 788 SOURce hw POWer LEVel IMMediate RCL 789 SOURce hw POWer LEV...

Page 893: ... 812 SOURce hw SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 811 TRACE LIST Pos0 State0 Pos1 State1 PosN 1 StateN 1 518 CLOCK frequency 513 COMMENT string 513 CONTROL LENGTH ControlLength 516 CONTROL LIST WIDTH4 Length m0m1 mx mM 1 523 COPYRIGHT string 514 DATA BITLENGTH BitLength 514 DATA LIST Length d0d1 dx dN 1 514 DATE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 515 EMPTYTAG Length EmptySequence 515 LEVEL OFFS RMSOffset_dB PeakOffset_...

Page 894: ...erating Manual 1176 8016 02 17 OPC 506 OPT 506 PRE 507 PSC 507 RCL 507 RST 507 SAV 508 SRE 508 STB 508 TRG 508 TST 509 WAI 509 SENSe ch POWer SNUMber 586 SENSe ch POWer STATus DEVice 587 SENSe ch POWer SVERsion 587 SENSe ch POWer TYPE 588 ...

Page 895: ...just ALC Table 228 Adjust All 121 Adjust I Q modulator 121 Adjust Level 121 Adjust Synthesis 121 Adjust Synthesis Extension 121 Adjustment active Reference oscillator 216 Adjustment Data 225 Adjustment frequency Reference oscillator 217 Adjustments All 121 ALC automatic level control 226 786 ALC Auto 855 ALC On 226 855 ALC S H 855 ALC Table 855 AM Depth 252 AM External Coupling 252 AM Sensitivity ...

Page 896: ...able 205 Restart delay 206 Settings 204 Setup 203 State 205 Trigger 205 Bias I Q out 318 Binary data Edit rules 532 Bit energy to noise power density 313 Bit error rate Clock slope 193 Configuration settings 191 Data bits 189 Data enable 194 Data polarity 193 Errors 189 External restart 193 General Settings 189 Impedance 195 Max data bits 192 Max errors 192 Mode 192 No clock 190 No sync 190 Patter...

Page 897: ...k rate mode 416 Clock Reference 328 Clock signal BER BLER measurement 185 Clock signal connector BER BLER 202 Clock slope Bit error rate 193 Block error rate 200 Clock Source 402 449 603 DM 378 Closed loop power control see NRP Z level control 228 CLPC see NRP Z level control 228 Coding DM 356 Colon 489 Column Separator Import Export User Correction data 236 Comma 489 Command sequence recommendati...

Page 898: ...de 291 Current Level 286 Current range without recalculation 376 Current Range without Recalculation 401 448 606 Current Segment 394 Current Sensors 129 Cursor keys 27 Cursor Length 367 Cursor Position 368 Cut 167 Cut Off Frequency Factor 360 Cut data editor 365 CW continuous wave 333 CW Interferer 310 CW Switching 359 CW Mod 333 D Data bits Bit error rate 189 Data enable BER BLER measurement 187 ...

Page 899: ... Edge form of ramp envelope DM 370 Edge slope of ramp envelope 370 Edit Binary data 532 Edit User Correction Data 234 Electrostatic discharge 33 EMF LF Level display 263 EMF Level display 226 EMI suppression 33 Emulation IDN string 146 Language 145 Mode 145 Set IDN and OPT to default 146 Enable LAN interface 150 ENABle 497 Enable registers Remote 507 End of measurement BER BLER measurement 185 Ent...

Page 900: ...ter parameter Impact 348 Filter Parameter DM 360 Firmware version 123 Fix marker delay to current range 376 402 449 614 Flat RF signal Optimisation mode high quality 307 Floating licenses 124 FM deviation 255 FM external coupling 256 FM mode 254 FM sensitivity 255 FM source 254 FM state 254 FM DC mode 213 Free space Internal flash hard disk 131 FREQ OFFSET 852 Frequency 220 Annotation setup securi...

Page 901: ... Imbalance I Q digital 306 Imbalance I Q analog 300 746 Impairments analog 300 Impairments digital 306 692 Impedance Bit error rate 195 Block error rate 201 External input 253 256 259 Impedance Clock Input 140 Impedance trigger input 140 Import License Key 128 Import Export List Mode data 295 User Correction data 236 237 Import Export List Mode data 293 Inactive Licenses 128 INF 487 INFO key 84 In...

Page 902: ...371 Level control 226 786 Level display 82 Level display EMF 226 Level display EMF LF 263 Level EMF I Q out 318 Level limit RF level 223 231 Level mode 415 Level mode ARB 641 Level offset 223 Power Sensors 246 State power sensors 246 LEVEL OFFSET 853 Level Sweep 283 Level user correction 232 LevelSweep 854 LF frequency sweep Retrace 268 LF gen frequency 252 255 258 263 LF gen shape 252 255 258 263...

Page 903: ...d Baseband Input 719 Menu structure Access denied 88 Header 88 Menu area 88 Messages Commands 461 Instrument 460 Instrument responses 461 Interface 460 MIN 487 Minimum Noise System Bandwidth Ratio AWGN 310 Mnemonics 483 Optional 485 MOD OFF 852 MOD ON OFF Key 249 Mode 426 619 Bit error rate 192 Block error rate 199 Emulation 145 FM 254 Level Sweep 283 LF Gen 264 LF sweep 264 List Mode 290 Pulse ge...

Page 904: ...300 RF signal 211 Offset I Q out 319 Offset Level 223 Offset DC 406 Old password Setup security 149 Old user password Setup security 149 On time BER BLER test generator 205 ON OFF ratio marker 337 ON OFF Ratio Marker 401 612 DM 376 Online help Working with 104 Open source acknowledgment 19 Open source acknowledgments 124 Operating concept 63 Operating system 41 Operation complete Remote 506 Operat...

Page 905: ...Phase Step MCCW 441 PhiM see ɸM 256 Ping LXI 58 Play list 400 409 418 420 Play list file Sequencing list file 409 Playlist See play list 409 Point to point connection 43 Polarity Pulse Modulation 261 Power List Mode 292 Power AWGN 313 Power of starting carrier 433 622 Power of starting carrier MCCW 441 Power ramping 333 DM 370 Power reference 428 Power sensors Aperture time 248 Auto once 247 Displ...

Page 906: ...setup Map network share 169 Rect test signal 380 Rect Test Signal 405 Reference Source oscillator 216 Reference frequency External 216 Reference Mode AWGN 312 Reference oscillator 213 Adjustment active 216 Adjustment frequency 217 External frequency 216 RF off state 216 Settings 215 Source 216 synchronization bandwidth 216 Registers 495 Release notes 19 REM LLO 854 Remote Bluetooth 143 RS232 143 R...

Page 907: ...Rotary knob 27 RS232 Baud rate 144 Parity 144 Serial interface 143 Stop bits 144 Run Update 129 Running 391 445 DM 373 S Safety instructions 18 SAMBA SMB How to 171 Sample Rate Sorurce 454 Sample Rate Source Baseband Input 721 Sample Rate Source Digital I Q Output Settings 320 Sample Rate Value 455 Sample Rate Value Digital I Q Output Settings 321 Sample and Hold mode 786 Sample Hold mode 226 Samp...

Page 908: ...generator 269 Reference oscillator 215 Setup Accept security settings 153 Annotation amplitude security 151 Annotation frequency security 151 BER BLER test generator 203 Change password security 150 Confirm password security 149 Confirm password user 149 Date 136 Display lock security 151 Internal adjustments 120 LAN services 150 New password security 149 New password user 149 Old password securit...

Page 909: ... MCCW 438 State User Correction 233 State Power Ramp Control 370 State Bit error rate 190 Block error rate 198 Status Network settings 137 Queries 501 Status byte Remote 505 508 Status byte STB 498 Status information 852 Status Information 128 status messages FREQ OFFSET 852 MOD OFF 852 OVERLOAD 853 RF OFF 852 Status messages ALC On 855 AttFixed 855 Auto 855 BUSY 853 EXT REF 853 LEVEL OFFSET 853 L...

Page 910: ... Clock Mode 521 Segment Comment 523 Segment Files 523 Segment Level Offset 523 Target Crest Factor 427 Target CW Frequency AWGN 311 Target level NRP Z level control 231 NRP Z power control 794 Terminated by Bit error rate 190 Block error rate 197 Test Check front panel 134 Test generator BER BLER 202 Test setup BER BLER measurement 183 Test signal ARB generator 380 Test Signal 404 405 Text paramte...

Page 911: ...17 User Mapping Catalog DM 357 Delete DM 357 Load DM 357 User name Map network share 169 User Name Setup 149 User password Security 149 Setup 149 User variation RF frequency settings 212 Variation active 212 Variation step 212 V Value User Correction 233 Variable FSK Deviation 359 Variation Active 212 Variation step 212 Variation Step 212 225 Vector diagram 180 Vector modulation 296 Vertical strok...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands